Electrical System: GI MA

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
GI
SECTION EL MA
EM
LC
EC
CONTENTS
FE
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................5 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR SYSTEM - ......................................................................52 AT
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............5 Component Parts and Harness Connector
Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis ..............................5 Location .....................................................................52
Precautions for Harness Repair ..................................5 System Description....................................................52 AX
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.....................6 Schematic ..................................................................55
HARNESS CONNECTOR................................................7 Wiring Diagram - DTRL -...........................................56
SU
Description ...................................................................7 Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................60
STANDARDIZED RELAY................................................9 Bulb Replacement .....................................................63
Description ...................................................................9 Aiming Adjustment .....................................................64 BR
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING.........................................11 PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS .....................65
Schematic ..................................................................11 System Description....................................................65
Wiring Diagram - POWER - ......................................12 Schematic ..................................................................67 ST
Inspection...................................................................19 Wiring Diagram - TAIL/L -..........................................68
GROUND........................................................................20 Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................73
Ground Distribution....................................................20 STOP LAMP ..................................................................74
RS
COMBINATION SWITCH ..............................................32 Wiring Diagram - STOP/L - .......................................74
Check.........................................................................32 BACK-UP LAMP............................................................76 BT
Replacement..............................................................33 Wiring Diagram - BACK/L - .......................................76
STEERING SWITCH......................................................34 FRONT FOG LAMP.......................................................77
Check.........................................................................34 System Description....................................................77 HA
HEATED STEERING .....................................................35 Wiring Diagram - F/FOG - .........................................78
Component Parts and Harness Connector Aiming Adjustment .....................................................81
Location .....................................................................35 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS .....82 SC
System Description....................................................35 System Description....................................................82
Wiring Diagram - H/STRG - ......................................37 Wiring Diagram - TURN - ..........................................84
HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ...............................................38 Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................86
Component Parts and Harness Connector Electrical Components Inspection .............................86
Location .....................................................................38 CORNERING LAMP ......................................................87 IDX
System Description....................................................38 System Description....................................................87
Schematic ..................................................................41 Wiring Diagram - CORNER - ....................................89
Wiring Diagram - H/LAMP -.......................................42 ILLUMINATION..............................................................92
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure............................46 System Description....................................................92
CONSULT-II Application Items ..................................47 Schematic ..................................................................93
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................47 Wiring Diagram - ILL - ...............................................94
Bulb Replacement .....................................................49 INTERIOR, STEP, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND
Aiming Adjustment .....................................................51 TRUNK ROOM LAMPS ...............................................100
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
System Description..................................................100 Component Parts and Harness Connector
Schematic ................................................................103 Location ...................................................................184
Wiring Diagram - INT/L - .........................................104 System Description..................................................184
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................109 Wiring Diagram - DEF -...........................................185
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................110 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................187
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer.............112 CONSULT-II Application Items ................................188
METERS AND GAUGES.............................................125 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................189
Component Parts and Harness Connector Electrical Components Inspection ...........................192
Location ...................................................................125 Filament Check........................................................192
System Description..................................................125 Filament Repair .......................................................193
Combination Meter ..................................................127 AUDIO ..........................................................................195
Schematic ................................................................128 System Description..................................................195
Wiring Diagram - METER - .....................................129 Schematic ................................................................196
Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Wiring Diagram - AUDIO -.......................................197
Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode ........................130 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................202
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................131 Inspection.................................................................203
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................140 Wiring Diagram - REMOTE -...................................204
BOARD COMPUTER...................................................141 AUDIO ANTENNA .......................................................205
System Description..................................................141 Wiring Diagram - W/ANT - ......................................205
Wiring Diagram - B/COMP -....................................143 Location of Antenna.................................................206
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................145 Window Antenna Repair ..........................................206
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................146 POWER SUNROOF.....................................................208
COMPASS ...................................................................147 System Description..................................................208
System Description..................................................147 Wiring Diagram - SROOF - .....................................209
Wiring Diagram - COMPAS -...................................149 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................210
WARNING LAMPS ......................................................150 CONSULT-II Application Items ................................211
Schematic ................................................................150 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................211
Wiring Diagram - WARN - .......................................151 DOOR MIRROR ...........................................................213
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................158 Wiring Diagram - MIRROR - ...................................213
A/T INDICATOR...........................................................159 AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR .................214
Wiring Diagram - AT/IND -.......................................159 Wiring Diagram - I/MIRR -.......................................214
WARNING CHIME .......................................................161 TRUNK LID AND FUEL FILLER LID OPENER .........215
Component Parts and Harness Connector Wiring Diagram - T&FLID -......................................215
Location ...................................................................161 TELEPHONE (PRE WIRE) ..........................................216
System Description..................................................161 Wiring Diagram - PHONE - .....................................216
Wiring Diagram - CHIME - ......................................163 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER ............................217
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................166 Component Parts and Harness Connector
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................167 Location ...................................................................217
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................168 System Description..................................................218
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER ..................................176 Schematic ................................................................221
System Description..................................................176 Wiring Diagram - AUT/DP - .....................................222
Wiring Diagram - WIPER - ......................................178 On Board Diagnosis ................................................227
Removal and Installation .........................................179 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................229
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .....................................180 POWER SEAT .............................................................251
Washer Tube Layout ...............................................180 Wiring Diagram - SEAT - .........................................251
HORN ...........................................................................181 HEATED SEAT ............................................................252
Wiring Diagram - HORN - .......................................181 Wiring Diagram - HSEAT - ......................................252
CIGARETTE LIGHTER................................................182 Seatback Heating Unit.............................................254
Wiring Diagram - CIGAR -.......................................182 REAR SUNSHADE ......................................................255
CLOCK.........................................................................183 Component Parts and Harness Connector
Wiring Diagram - CLOCK -......................................183 Location ...................................................................255
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER.....................................184 System Description..................................................256
EL-2
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Wiring Diagram - SHADE -......................................257 Component Parts and Harness Connector
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................259 Location ...................................................................375
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) ...261 System Description..................................................376 GI
System Description..................................................261 System Composition................................................376
POWER WINDOW .......................................................262 Wiring Diagram - NATS -.........................................377 MA
System Description..................................................262 CONSULT-II .............................................................378
Schematic ................................................................265 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................381
Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - ..................................266 How to Replace IVIS (NATS) IMMU .......................394 EM
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................272 NAVIGATION SYSTEM ...............................................395
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................273 Precautions ..............................................................395
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................273 System Description..................................................395 LC
POWER DOOR LOCK.................................................280 Schematic ................................................................404
Component Parts and Harness Connector Wiring Diagram - NAVI -..........................................405
EC
Location ...................................................................280 Self-diagnosis Mode ................................................410
System Description..................................................280 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode ...............................413
Schematic ................................................................281 Control Panel Mode.................................................425 FE
Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK -.....................................282 Guide Volume Setting..............................................431
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................286 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................432
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................287 This Condition Is Not Abnormal...............................438 AT
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................288 Program Loading .....................................................447
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM.......................297 CAN COMMUNICATION .............................................448
Component Parts and Harness Connector System Description..................................................448
AX
Location ...................................................................297 CAN SYSTEM (FOR TCS MODELS)..........................450
System Description..................................................297 Component Parts and Harness Connector SU
Schematic ................................................................301 Location ...................................................................450
Wiring Diagram - KEYLES - ....................................302 System Description..................................................450
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................307 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ..........................................451 BR
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................308 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................452
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................309 Component Inspection.............................................462
ID Code Entry Procedure ........................................324 CAN SYSTEM (FOR VDC MODELS) .........................463 ST
Keyfob Battery Replacement...................................327 Component Parts and Harness Connector
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) Location ...................................................................463
RS
SYSTEM.......................................................................328 System Description..................................................463
Component Parts and Harness Connector Wiring Diagram - CAN - ..........................................464
Location ...................................................................328 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................465 BT
System Description..................................................329 Component Inspection.............................................477
Schematic ................................................................334 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION...............................478
Wiring Diagram - VEHSEC - ...................................336 Engine Compartment...............................................478 HA
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................342 Passenger Compartment.........................................480
CONSULT-II Application Item ..................................343 HARNESS LAYOUT ....................................................483
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................344 How to Read Harness Layout .................................483
SC
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT .......................361 Outline......................................................................484
Description ...............................................................361 Main Harness...........................................................486
CONSULT-II .............................................................363 Engine Room Harness ............................................490
Schematic ................................................................366 Engine Control Harness ..........................................494
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table ........368 Body Harness ..........................................................496 IDX
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER..................371 Body No. 2 Harness ................................................498
Wiring Diagram - TRNSCV - ...................................371 Tail Harness .............................................................500
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................372 Room Lamp Harness...............................................501
IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - Front Door Harness .................................................502
NATS)...........................................................................375 Rear Door Harness..................................................504
BULB SPECIFICATIONS ............................................506
EL-3
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Headlamp.................................................................506 Interior Lamp............................................................506
Exterior Lamp ..........................................................506 WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES).............507
EL-4
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” NHEL0001
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of GI
collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system
uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag,
depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. The SRS MA
system composition which is available to INFINITI I35 is as follows (The composition varies according to
optional equipment.):
쐌 For a frontal collision EM
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable. LC
쐌 For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring
EC
harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual. FE
WARNING:
쐌 To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per- AT
formed by an authorized INFINITI dealer.
쐌 Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air AX
Bag Module, see the RS section.
쐌 Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this SU
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connec-
tor (and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
BR
ST
RS
Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis NHEL0311
CAN SYSTEM
쐌 Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to the measurement
NHEL0311S01
BT
terminals.
쐌 Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0V or less. HA
SC
Precautions for Harness Repair NHEL0312

CAN SYSTEM NHEL0312S01 IDX
쐌 Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted
line must be within 110 mm (4.33 in)]
PKIA0306E
EL-5
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Harness Repair (Cont’d)
쐌 Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts.
(The spliced wire will become separated and the characteris-
tics of twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis NHEL0002

When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
쐌 Refer to GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
쐌 Refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
쐌 Refer to GI-36, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
쐌 Refer to GI-25, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.
EL-6
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
Description NHEL0003
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) NHEL0003S01
쐌 The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
쐌 The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the GI
illustration below.
Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector.
MA
CAUTION:
Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example] EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL769DA
EL-7
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description (Cont’d)
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) =NHEL0003S02
쐌 A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those
related to OBD.
쐌 The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnec-
tion.
쐌 The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustra-
tion below.
CAUTION:
쐌 Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
쐌 Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
SEL769V
EL-8
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS NHEL0004S01
Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL881H
AX
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS NHEL0004S02
1M 1 Make 2M 2 Make SU
1T 1 Transfer 1M·1B 1 Make 1 Break
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL882H
IDX
EL-9
STANDARDIZED RELAY
SEL188W
EL-10
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0005
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “GROUND DISTRIBUTION”, EL-20.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL857Q
EL-11
Wiring Diagram — POWER —
Wiring Diagram — POWER — NHEL0006

BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION NHEL0006S01
MEL858Q
EL-12
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL254O
EL-13
MEL859Q
EL-14
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON” NHEL0006S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL256O
EL-15
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START” NHEL0006S03
MEL257O
EL-16
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL860Q
EL-17
MEL861Q
EL-18
Inspection
Inspection NHEL0007
FUSE NHEL0007S01
쐌 If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem
before installing new fuse. GI
쐌 Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than
specified rating.
쐌 Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse MA
holder properly.
쐌 Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is
not used for a long period of time.
EM
CEL083
FUSIBLE LINK NHEL0007S02 LC

A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or
by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit
tester or test lamp. EC
CAUTION:
쐌 If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit
(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. FE
In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of
problem.
쐌 Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Impor-
AT
SEL165W tant: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness,
vinyl or rubber parts.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
CIRCUIT BREAKER (PTC THERMISTOR TYPE) NHEL0007S03
The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow.
The temperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies BT
with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element’s
temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified
level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to control the circuit HA
current.
Reduced current flow will cause the element to cool. Resistance
falls accordingly and normal circuit current flow is allowed to SC
resume.
SEL109W
IDX
EL-19
GROUND
Ground Distribution
Ground Distribution NHEL0008

MAIN HARNESS NHEL0008S01
MEL877Q
EL-20
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL878Q
EL-21
GROUND
MEL879Q
EL-22
GROUND
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS NHEL0008S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL880Q
EL-23
GROUND
MEL234O
EL-24
GROUND
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL235O
EL-25
GROUND
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS NHEL0008S03
MEL881Q
EL-26
GROUND
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL882Q
EL-27
GROUND
BODY HARNESS NHEL0008S04
MEL883Q
EL-28
GROUND
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL884Q
EL-29
GROUND
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS NHEL0008S05
MEL885Q
EL-30
GROUND
TAIL HARNESS NHEL0008S06
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL620K
EL-31
COMBINATION SWITCH
Check
Check NHEL0009
MEL874Q
EL-32
COMBINATION SWITCH
Replacement
Replacement NHEL0313
For removal and installation of spiral cable, refer to RS-21,
“Installation — Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable”.
쐌 Each switch can be replaced without removing spiral cable. GI
1. Remove the instrument lower panel on driver side.
2. Remove the steering column cover.
3. Remove lighting switch or wiper and washer switch mounting MA
screw.
4. Remove lighting switch or wiper and washer switch from the EM
spiral cable.
MEL158P
5. Disconnect lighting switch or wiper and washer switch connec-
tor. LC
EC
FE
AT
MEL159P
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-33
STEERING SWITCH
Check
Check NHEL0011
MEL243O
EL-34
HEATED STEERING
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Parts and Harness Connector

Location NHEL0314
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL452YA
System Description AX
NHEL0315
The heated steering system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit. The heated steering system
operates only for approximately 30 minutes after heated steering switch is turned “ON”. SU
Then the heated steering system is turned “OFF” when the heated steering switch is turned “ON” again or
ignition switch “OFF” within 30 minutes after heated steering system “ON”.
Power is supplied at all times BR
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to heated steering relay terminal 3 ST
쐌 through 10A fuse (No. 72, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied. RS
쐌 to the heated steering relay terminal 1 and
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 27. BT
Ground is supplied
쐌 to terminal 2 and 5 of heated steering switch and HA
쐌 to combination switch (heated steering switch) terminal 2
쐌 through body grounds M9, M25 and M87.
When the heated steering switch is turned ON, ground is supplied
SC
쐌 through terminal 1 of heated steering switch
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 4.
Terminal 40 of the smart entrance control unit then supplies ground to the heated steering relay terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the heated steering relay is energized.
Power is supplied IDX
쐌 through terminal 5 of heated steering relay
쐌 to heated steering switch terminal 4 and
쐌 to combination switch (heated steering switch) terminal 1.
쐌 through terminal 3 of combination switch (heated steering switch)
쐌 to the heated steering (thermostat).
Ground is supplied for heated steering
쐌 through heated steering
EL-35
HEATED STEERING
System Description (Cont’d)
쐌 to combination switch (heated steering switch) terminal 4.
With power and ground supplied, the heated steering heats.
When the system is activated, the heated steering indicator lamp illuminates in the heated steering switch.
EL-36
HEATED STEERING
Wiring Diagram — H/STRG —
Wiring Diagram — H/STRG — =NHEL0316
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL587Q
IDX
SEL478YA
EL-37
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)

Location NHEL0252
SEL048Y
System Description NHEL0253

The headlamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch and smart
entrance control unit. And the exterior lamp battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance control
unit.
OUTLINE NHEL0253S01
Power is supplied at all times
쐌 to headlamp LH relay terminals 1 and 6
쐌 through 20A fuse (No. 54, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
쐌 to headlamp LH relay terminal 3
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 6
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminal 3
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
Ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
Power Supply to Low Beam and High Beam NHEL0253S0101
When lighting switch is in 2ND or PASS position, ground is supplied
쐌 to headlamp LH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 21
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminal 22,
쐌 from lighting switch terminal 12, and
EL-38
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 59
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminal 60,
쐌 from lighting switch terminal 12.
Headlamp relays (LH and RH) are energized and then power is supplied to headlamps (LH and RH). GI
LOW BEAM OPERATION NHEL0253S02
When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in LOW (“B”) position, power is supplied MA
쐌 from terminal 7 of each headlamp relay
쐌 to terminal 3 of each headlamp
Ground is supplied EM
쐌 to headlamp LH terminal 4
쐌 through body grounds E11, E22 and E53, and LC
쐌 to headlamp RH terminal 4
쐌 through body grounds E11, E22 and E53.
With power and ground supplied, the headlamp(s) will illuminate. EC
HIGH BEAM OPERATION/FLASH-TO-PASS OPERATION NHEL0253S03
When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in HIGH (“A”) position or PASS (“C”) position, FE
power is supplied
쐌 from terminal 5 of each headlamp relay
AT
쐌 to terminal 1 of each headlamp, and
쐌 to combination meter terminal 26 for the HIGH BEAM indicator.
Ground is supplied AX
쐌 to headlamp LH terminal 2
쐌 through lighting switch terminals 6 and 5
SU
쐌 through body grounds E11, E22 and E53, and
쐌 to headlamp RH terminal 2
쐌 to combination meter terminal 27 for the HIGH BEAM indicator BR
ST
With power and ground supplied, the high beams and the high beam indicator illuminate.
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL NHEL0253S08 RS
While the headlamp is turned ON by “2ND” of lighting switch, the 5 minute timer is activated when the igni-
tion switch is turned from ON (or START) to OFF (ACC OFF).
Continuity between terminals 21 and 22, and between terminals 59 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will BT
be disturbed after 5 minutes, then the headlamps will be turned off.
While the headlamp is turned ON by “AUTO” of lighting switch, the 5 minutes timer is activated when the igni-
tion switch signal changes from ON (or START) to OFF (ACC OFF), and either one of front door switch LH HA
or RH ON signal is input.
The auto light delay off timer is activated as the following:
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the timer is activated, the timer in operation SC
is discontinued and the 45 second timer is reset.
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the timer is activated, the timer is discontin-
ued and the 45 second timer is reset.
쐌 When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the timer is activated, the timer
is discontinued and the 5 minute timer is reset.
IDX
쐌 When all the door switch ON signals are input while the timer is activated, the timer is discontinued and
the 45 second timer is reset.
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode and auto light delay off timer period can be changed by the function
setting of CONSULT-II (EL-47).
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after headlamps are turned to off by the battery saver
control, ground is supplied
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
쐌 to headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59,
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and
EL-39
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
쐌 through lighting switch terminal 12.
Then headlamps illuminate again.
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION NHEL0253S05
The auto light control system has an optical sensor inside it that detects outside brightness.
When lighting switch is in “AUTO” position, ground is supplied
When ignition switch is turn to “ON” or “START” position, outside brightness is darker than prescribed level.
Ground is supplied
쐌 to headlamp relay LH and RH terminals 2
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 21, 59 and 43, 64
Then both headlamp relays and tail lamp relay are energized, headlamps (low or high) and tail lamps are illu-
minate according to switch position.
Auto light operation allows headlamps and tail lamps to go off when outside brightness is brighter than pre-
scribed level.
NOTE:
The delay time changes (maximum of 20 seconds) as the outside brightness changes.
For parking license and tail lamps auto operation, refer to “PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS”.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM NHEL0253S06
The vehicle security system will flash the low beams if the system is triggered. Refer to “VEHICLE SECURITY
(THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM” (EL-331).
XENON HEADLAMP NHEL0253S07
Xenon type headlamp is adopted to the low beam headlamps. Xenon bulbs do not use a filament. Instead,
they produce light when a high voltage current is passed between two tungsten electrodes through a mixture
of xenon (an inert gas) and certain other metal halides. In addition to added lighting power, electronic control
of the power supply gives the headlamps stable quality and tone color.
Following are some of the many advantage of the xenon type headlamp.
쐌 The light produced by the headlamps is white color approximating sunlight that is easy on the eyes.
쐌 Light output is nearly double that of halogen headlamps, affording increased area of illumination.
쐌 The light features a high relative spectral distribution at wavelengths to the human eye is most sensitive,
which means that even in the rain, more light is reflected back from the road surface toward the vehicle,
for added visibility.
쐌 Power consumption is approximately 25 percent less than halogen headlamps, reducing battery load.
SEL956V
EL-40
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0254
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL260O
EL-41
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — NHEL0255
MEL588Q
EL-42
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL589Q
EL-43
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
MEL263O
EL-44
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL545Y
EL-45
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure NHEL0256

“HEAD LAMP” NHEL0256S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
the data link connector.
SEF289X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
SKIA3098E
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

If “SMART ENTRANCE” is not indicated, go to GI-42.
SEL398Y
6. Touch “HEAD LAMP”.
SEL401Y
7. Select diagnosis mode.

“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.
SEL400Y
EL-46
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
CONSULT-II Application Items
CONSULT-II Application Items NHEL0317

“HEAD LAMP” NHEL0317S01
Data Monitor NHEL0317S0101
GI
Monitored Item Description
IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.

MA
ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.
Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal.
AUTO LIGT SW
(AUTO position: ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF)
EM
Displays “Illumination outside of the vehicle (close to 5V when light/close to 0V when dark)” as
AUTO LIGT SENS
judged from the optical sensor signal. LC
LIGHT SW 1ST
(1ST or 2ND position: ON/Other than 1ST and 2ND position: OFF)
EC
LIGHT SW 2ND
(2ND position: ON/Other than 2ND position: OFF)
DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

FE
DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch RH.
AT
DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch.
Active Test NHEL0317S0102 AX

Test Item Description
TAIL LAMP Tail lamp relay can be operated by on-off operation of the tail lamp. SU
HEAD LAMP Headlamp relay can be operated by on-off operation of the headlamp.
AUTO LIGHT Night time dimming signal can be operated by on-off operation. BR
Work Support NHEL0317S0103 ST

Work Item Description
AUTO LIGHT SET

Auto light sensitivity can be changed in this mode. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four modes. RS
쐌 MODE 1 (Normal)/MODE 2 (Sensitive)/MODE 3 (Desensitized)/MODE 4 (Insensitive)
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed in this mode. Selects exterior lamp
BATTERY SAVER SET battery saver control mode between two modes. BT
쐌 MODE 1 (ON)/MODE 2 (OFF)
Auto light delay off timer period can be changed in this mode. Selects auto light delay off timer HA
period among eight modes.
ILL DELAY SET
쐌 MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (30 sec.)/MODE 4 (60 sec.)/ MODE 5 (90 sec.)/
MODE 6 (120 sec.)/MODE 7 (150 sec.)/MODE 8 (180 sec.)
SC
Trouble Diagnoses NHEL0258
WARNING:
쐌 The xenon headlamp has a high-tension current generating area. Be extremely careful when remov-
ing and installing. Be certain to disconnect the battery negative cable prior to removing or install-
ing. IDX
쐌 When the xenon headlamp is lit, do not touch the harness (covered with red or amber insulation),
bulb itself or the bulb socket with your bare hands.
쐌 Never service a xenon headlamp with wet hands.
쐌 When checking body side harness with a circuit tester, be certain to disconnect the harness con-
nector from the xenon headlamp.
쐌 When the xenon headlamp is lit, the xenon bulb must be installed in the headlamp housing. (Never
turn on xenon headlamp, if the bulb is out of the headlamp housing.)
EL-47
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
Make sure to install the bulb securely; if the xenon bulb is improperly installed in its socket, high-ten-
sion current leaks occur. This may lead to a melted bulb and/or bulb socket.
Symptom Possible cause Repair order
Neither headlamp operates. 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 13, located in fuse block (J/B)].
2. Lighting switch Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
3. Smart entrance control unit 49 of smart entrance control unit.
2. Check Lighting switch.
3. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-368)
LH headlamp (low and high beam) 1. 20A fuse 1. Check 20A fuse (No. 54, located in fuse and fusible
does not operate, but RH head- 2. Headlamp LH relay link box). Verify battery positive voltage is present at
lamp (low and high beam) does 3. Headlamp LH relay circuit terminals 1 and 6 of headlamp LH relay.
operate. 4. Lighting switch circuit 2. Check headlamp LH relay.
5. Smart entrance control unit 3. Check harness between headlamp LH relay and
smart entrance control unit.
4. Check harness between smart entrance control unit
and lighting switch.
RH headlamp (low and high beam) 1. 20A fuse 1. Check 20A fuse (No. 55, located in fuse and fusible
does not operate, but LH headlamp 2. Headlamp RH relay link box). Verify battery positive voltage is present at
(low and high beam) does operate. 3. Headlamp RH relay circuit terminals 1 and 6 of headlamp RH relay.
4. Lighting switch circuit 2. Check headlamp RH relay.
5. Smart entrance control unit 3. Check harness between headlamp RH relay and
LH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

but LH low beam operates. 2. 15A fuse 2. Check 15A fuse (No. 68, located in fuse and fusible
3. Headlamp LH relay link box). Verify battery positive voltage is present at
4. Open in the LH high beams cir- terminal 3 of headlamp LH relay.
cuit 3. Check headlamp LH relay.
5. Lighting switch 4. Check the following.
6. Lighting switch ground circuit a. Harness between headlamp LH relay terminal 5 and
headlamp LH for open circuit
b. Harness between headlamp LH and lighting switch
for open circuit
5. Check lighting switch.
6. Check harness between lighting switch and ground.
LH low beam does not operate, but 1. Headlamp LH relay 1. Check headlamp LH relay
LH high beam operates. 2. Open in the LH low beam circuit 2. Check harness between headlamp LH relay terminal
3. LH low beam ground circuit 7 and headlamp LH for open circuit.
4. Xenon bulb 3. Check harness between headlamp LH and ground.
5. HID control unit 4. Replace the xenon bulb with other side bulb or new
one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly, replace the
bulb.)
5. Replace the HID control unit with other side control
unit or new one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly,
replace the control unit.)
RH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

but RH low beam operates. 2. 15A fuse 2. Check 15A fuse (No. 69, located in fuse and fusible
3. Headlamp RH relay link box). Verify battery positive voltage is present at
4. Open in the RH high beams terminal 3 of headlamp RH relay.
circuit 3. Check headlamp RH relay.
5. Lighting switch 4. Check the following.
6. Lighting switch ground circuit a. Harness between headlamp RH relay terminal 5 and
headlamp RH for open circuit
b. Harness between headlamp RH and lighting switch
for open circuit
6. Check harness between lighting switch and ground.
EL-48
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
RH low beam does not operate, 1. Headlamp RH relay 1. Check headlamp RH relay
but RH high beam operates. 2. Open in the RH low beam cir- 2. Check harness between headlamp RH relay termi-
cuit nal 7 and headlamp RH for open circuit. GI
3. RH low beam ground circuit 3. Check harness between headlamp RH and ground.
4. Xenon bulb 4. Replace the xenon bulb with other side bulb or new
5. HID control unit one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly, replace the MA
bulb.)
unit or new one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly, EM
High beam indicator does not work. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.
2. Open in high beam indicator 2. Check the following. LC
circuit a. Harness between headlamp RH relay and combina-
tion meter for an open circuit
b. Harness between high beam indicator and lighting EC
switch
Exterior lamp battery saver control 1. Door switch LH or RH circuit 1. Check the following.
does not operate properly. 2. Smart entrance control unit a. Harness between smart entrance control unit and FE
door switch LH or RH for open or short circuit
b. Door switch LH or RH ground circuit
c. Door switch LH or RH AT
Bulb Replacement AX
NHEL0259
CAUTION:
쐌 After replacing a new xenon bulb, be sure to make aiming SU
adjustments.
쐌 Hold only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never
touch the glass envelope. BR
쐌 Do not leave headlamp reflector without bulb for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering head-
lamp body may affect the performance of the headlamp. ST
Remove headlamp bulb from the headlamp reflector just
before a replacement bulb is installed.
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. RS
2. Disconnect headlamp connector.
3. Remove headlamp assembly. BT
WARNING:
Never service a xenon headlamp without disconnecting nega-
tive battery cable and with wet hands. HA
SC
XENON BULB (LOW BEAM) NHEL0259S01

1. Remove headlamp seal cover by turning it counterclockwise.
IDX
2. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise with keep pushing, then
remove it.
SEL678W
EL-49
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Bulb Replacement (Cont’d)
3. Release retaining pin.
4. Remove the xenon bulb.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
쐌 When disposing of the xenon bulb, do not break it; always
dispose of it as is.
쐌 Make sure to install the bulb securely; if the xenon bulb is
improperly installed in its socket, high-tension current
leaks occur. This may lead to a melted bulb and/or bulb
socket.
SEL679W
HIGH BEAM NHEL0259S02

1. Turn the bulb clockwise (LH high beam) or counterclockwise
(RH high beam).
2. Remove the bulb.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
SEL680W
EL-50
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Aiming Adjustment
Aiming Adjustment =NHEL0260

LOW BEAM NHEL0260S01
1. Turn headlamp low beam on.
2. Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment. GI
쐌 First tighten the adjusting screw all the way and then
make adjustment by loosening the screw.
MA
EM
SEL681W
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL957VA
HA
SC
IDX
EL-51
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —

Location NHEL0261
SEL050YA

The headlamp system for Canada vehicles contains a daytime light control unit that activates the high beam
headlamps at approximately half illumination whenever the engine is running. If the parking brake is applied
before the engine is started the daytime lights will not be illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate once
the parking brake is released. Thereafter, the daytime lights will continue to operate when the parking brake
is applied.
And battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 6
Ground is supplied
쐌 to daytime light control unit terminal 16 and
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is also supplied
쐌 to daytime light control unit terminal 3,
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 28, located in the fuse block (J/B)], and
When the ignition switch is in the START position, power is supplied
쐌 to daytime light control unit terminal 2
HEADLAMP OPERATION NHEL0262S01
Power Supply to Low Beam and High Beam NHEL0262S0101
When lighting switch is in 2ND or PASS position, ground is supplied
EL-52
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminal 22
쐌 from lighting switch terminal 12, and
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 59 GI
Headlamp relays (LH and RH) are energized and then power is supplied to headlamps (LH and RH). MA
Low Beam Operation NHEL0262S0103
When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND and LOW (“B”) positions, ground is supplied EM
쐌 to terminal 4 of the headlamp LH
쐌 through body grounds E11, E22 and E53. LC
Ground is also supplied
쐌 to terminal 4 of the headlamp RH
쐌 through body grounds E11, E22 and E53. EC
With power and ground supplied, the low beam headlamps illuminate.
High Beam Operation/Flash-to-pass Operation FE
NHEL0262S0104
When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND and HIGH (“A”) or PASS (“C”) positions, ground is supplied
쐌 to terminal 2 of headlamp LH AT
쐌 through daytime light control unit terminals 10 and 13, and
쐌 through body grounds E11, E22 and E53. AX
쐌 to terminal 2 of headlamp RH SU
쐌 through daytime light control unit terminals 9 and 14
쐌 to combination meter terminal 27 for the HIGH BEAM indicator
쐌 through lighting switch terminals 9 and 8 BR
With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps and HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate. ST
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL NHEL0262S06
While the headlamp is turned ON by “2ND” of light switch, the 5 minute timer is activated when the ignition RS
switch is turned from ON (or START) to OFF (ACC OFF).
Continuity between terminals 21 and 22, and between terminals 59 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will
be disturbed after 5 minutes, then the headlamps will be turned off. BT
While the headlamp is turned ON by “AUTO” of light switch, the 5 minute timer is activated when the ignition
switch signal changes from ON (or START) to OFF (ACC OFF), and either one of front door switch LH or RH
ON signal is input. HA
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the timer is activated, the timer in operation
is discontinued and the 45 second timer is reset. SC
쐌 When all the door switch ON signals are input while the timer is activated, the timer is discontinued and IDX
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after headlamps are turned to off by the battery saver
control, ground is supply
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then
쐌 to headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60, and
EL-53
쐌 through lighting switch terminal 12.
Then headlamps illuminate again.
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION NHEL0262S03
For auto light operation, refer to “HEADLAMP” (EL-40).
DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION NHEL0262S04
With the engine running, the lighting switch in the OFF or 1ST position and parking brake released, power is
supplied
쐌 through daytime light control unit terminal 7
쐌 to terminal 1 of headlamp RH
쐌 to terminal 1 of headlamp LH.
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each headlamp.
쐌 through daytime light control unit terminals 9 and 10
Because the high beam headlamps are now wired in series, they operate at half illumination.
OPERATION NHEL0262S05
After starting the engine with the lighting switch in the “OFF” or “1ST” position, the headlamp high beam auto-
matically turns on. Lighting switch operations other than the above are the same as conventional light sys-
tems.
Engine With engine stopped With engine running
OFF 1ST 2ND OFF 1ST 2ND

Lighting switch
A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C
High beam X X O X X O O X O 왕* 왕* O 왕* 왕* O O X O
Headlamp
Low beam X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X O X
Clearance and tail lamp X X X O O O O O O X X X O O O O O O
License and instrument illumination

X X X O O O O O O X X X O O O O O O
lamp
A: “HIGH BEAM” position

B: “LOW BEAM” position
C: “FLASH TO PASS” position
O : Lamp “ON”
X : Lamp “OFF”
왕 : Lamp dims. (Added functions)
*: When starting the engine with the parking brake released, the daytime light will come ON.
When starting the engine with the parking brake pulled, the daytime light won’t come ON.
EL-54
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0263
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL264O
EL-55
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — NHEL0264
MEL590Q
EL-56
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL591Q
EL-57
MEL592Q
EL-58
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL593Q
EL-59
Trouble Diagnoses

WARNING:
쐌 The xenon headlamp has a high-tension current generating area. Be extremely careful when remov-
ing and installing. Be certain to disconnect the battery negative cable prior to removing or install-
ing.
쐌 When the xenon headlamp is lit, do not touch the harness (covered with red or amber insulation),
bulb itself or the bulb socket with your bare hands.
쐌 Never service a xenon headlamp with wet hands.
쐌 When checking body side harness with a circuit tester, be certain to disconnect the harness con-
nector from the xenon headlamp.
쐌 When the xenon headlamp is lit, the xenon bulb must be installed in the headlamp housing. (Never
turn on xenon headlamp, if the bulb is out of the headlamp housing.)
CAUTION:
Make sure to install the bulb securely; if the xenon bulb is improperly installed in its socket, high-ten-
sion current leaks occur. This may lead to a melted bulb and/or bulb socket.
Neither headlamp operates. 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 13, located in fuse block (J/B)].
2. Lighting switch Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
2. Check Lighting switch.
LH headlamp (low and high beam) 1. 20A fuse 1. Check 20A fuse (No. 54, located in fuse and fusible
does not operate, but RH head- 2. Headlamp LH relay link box). Verify battery positive voltage is present at
lamp (low and high beam) does 3. Headlamp LH relay circuit terminals 1 and 6 of headlamp LH relay.
operate. 4. Lighting switch circuit 2. Check headlamp LH relay.
5. Smart entrance control unit 3. Check harness between headlamp LH relay and
RH headlamp (low and high beam) 1. 20A fuse 1. Check 20A fuse (No. 55, located in fuse and fusible
does not operate, but LH headlamp 2. Headlamp RH relay link box). Verify battery positive voltage is present at
(low and high beam) does operate. 3. Headlamp RH relay circuit terminals 1 and 6 of headlamp RH relay.
4. Lighting switch circuit 2. Check headlamp RH relay.
5. Smart entrance control unit 3. Check harness between headlamp RH relay and
LH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

but LH low beam operates. 2. 15A fuse 2. Check 15A fuse (No. 68, located in fuse and fusible
3. Headlamp LH relay link box). Verify battery positive voltage is present at
4. Headlamp LH relay circuit terminal 3 of headlamp LH relay.
5. Headlamp LH high beams cir- 3. Check headlamp LH relay.
cuit 4. Check harness between headlamp LH relay and
6. Lighting switch daytime light control unit.
7. Lighting switch circuit 5. Check harness between headlamp LH and lighting
8. Daytime light control unit switch.
7. Check the following.
a. Harness between daytime light control unit and light-
ing switch
b. Harness between lighting switch and ground
8. Check daytime light control unit.
EL-60
LH low beam does not operate, but 1. Headlamp LH relay 1. Check headlamp LH relay.
LH high beam operates. 2. Open in the LH low beam circuit 2. Check harness between headlamp LH relay terminal
3. LH low beam ground circuit 7 and headlamp LH for open circuit. GI
4. Xenon bulb 3. Check harness between headlamp LH and ground.
5. HID control unit 4. Replace the xenon bulb with other side bulb or new
one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly, replace the MA
bulb.)
unit or new one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly, EM
RH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

but RH low beam operates. 2. 15A fuse 2. Check 15A fuse (No. 69, located in fuse and fusible LC
3. Headlamp RH relay link box). Verify battery positive voltage is present at
4. Headlamp RH relay circuit terminal 3 of headlamp RH relay.
5. Open in the RH high beams 3. Check headlamp RH relay. EC
circuit 4. Check harness between headlamp RH relay and
6. Lighting switch daytime light control unit.
7. Lighting switch circuit 5. Check harness between headlamp RH and lighting FE
8. Daytime light control unit switch.
a. Harness between daytime light control unit and light-
AT
ing switch
b. Harness between lighting switch and ground
8. Check daytime light control unit. AX
RH low beam does not operate, 1. Headlamp RH relay 1. Check headlamp RH relay.
but RH high beam operates. 2. Open in the RH low beam cir- 2. Check harness between headlamp RH relay termi- SU
cuit nal 7 and headlamp RH for open circuit.
3. RH low beam ground circuit 3. Check harness between headlamp RH and ground.
4. Xenon bulb 4. Replace the xenon bulb with other side bulb or new
5. HID control unit one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly, replace the
BR
bulb.)
unit or new one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly, ST
High beam indicator does not work. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter. RS
2. Open in high beam indicator 2. Check the following.
circuit a. Harness between daytime light control unit and com-
bination meter for an open circuit
b. Harness between high beam indicator and lighting
BT
switch
Exterior lamp battery saver control 1. Door switch LH or RH circuit 1. Check the following. HA
does not operate properly. 2. Smart entrance control unit a. Harness between smart entrance control unit and
door switch LH or RH for open or short circuit
b. Door switch LH or RH ground circuit SC
c. Door switch LH or RH
Daytime light control does not 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

operate properly. 2. Fuse check 2. Check the following.
3. Parking brake switch a. 10A fuse [No. 28, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Verify
4. Parking brake switch circuit battery positive voltage is present at terminal 3 of IDX
5. Daytime light control unit daytime light control unit.
b. 10A fuse [No. 21, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Verify
battery positive voltage is present at terminal 2 of
daytime light control unit.
3. Check parking brake switch.
4. Check harness between parking brake switch and
daytime light control unit.
5. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-62)
EL-61
SEL576Y
DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE NHEL0265S03
Terminal Wire Voltage

Item Condition
No. color (Approximate values)
1 BR Alternator When turning ignition switch to “ON” Less than 1V
When engine is running Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Less than 1V
2 BR/W Start signal When turning ignition switch to “ST” Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “ON” from “ST” Less than 1V
3 G Power source When turning ignition switch to “ON” Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “ST” Battery voltage
4 OR Power source When turning ignition switch to “ON” Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Battery voltage
5 R Power source When turning ignition switch to “ON” Battery voltage
When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Battery voltage
EL-62
Terminal Wire Voltage

Item Condition
No. color (Approximate values)
6 P LH hi beam When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with Battery voltage
“HI BEAM” position GI
When releasing parking brake with engine running and Approx. half battery
turning lighting switch to “OFF” (daytime light operation) voltage
CAUTION:
MA
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P
position.
EM
7 B/OR RH hi beam When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with Battery voltage
“HI BEAM” position LC
CAUTION: EC
position.
FE
9 LG RH hi beam When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with Less than 1V
(ground) “HI BEAM” position
AT
CAUTION: AX
position.
SU
10 L/Y LH hi beam When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with Less than 1V
(ground) “HI BEAM” position
BR
CAUTION: ST
position.
RS
13 R/B Lighting switch When turning lighting switch to “HI BEAM” Battery voltage
14 L/W (Hi beam)
When turning lighting switch to “FLASH TO PASS” Battery voltage BT
16 B Ground — —
17 Y Parking brake When parking brake is released Battery voltage HA

switch
When parking brake is set Less than 1.5V
SC
Bulb Replacement NHEL0266

Refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-49). IDX
EL-63
Aiming Adjustment
Aiming Adjustment NHEL0267

Refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-51).
EL-64
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
System Description

The parking, license and tail lamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combi-
nation switch and smart entrance control unit. The battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance
control unit. GI
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminals 1 and 3
쐌 through 10A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and MA
EM
When ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. LC
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 26 EC
Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64.
쐌 through body grounds M9, M25 and M87. FE
LIGHTING OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH NHEL0207S01
When lighting switch is in 1ST (or 2ND) position, ground is supplied AT
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57
AX
쐌 through lighting switch and body grounds E11, E22 and E53.
Tail lamp relay is then energized and the parking, license, side marker and tail lamps illuminate.
SU
LIGHTING OPERATION BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM NHEL0207S03
When lighting switch is in AUTO position, ground is supplied
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 BR
ST
Tail lamp relay is then energized and the parking, license, side marker and tail lamps illuminate.
While parking, license, side maker and tail lamps are turned ON by “1ST” or “2ND” of light swith, the 5 min-
RS
utes timer is activated when the ignition switch is turned from ON (or START) to OFF (ACC OFF).
Continuity between terminals 19 and 20, and between terminals 57 and 58 of smart entrance control unit will BT
Then the parking, license, side marker and tail lamps are turned off.
While the headlamp is turned ON by “AUTO” of lighting switch, the 5 minute timer is activated when the igni- HA
tion switch signal changes from ON (or START) to OFF (ACC OFF), and either one of LH or RH front door
switch ON signal is input.
The auto light delay off timer is activated as the following: SC
is discontinued and the 5 minute timer is reset. IDX
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST (or 2ND) after the parking, license, side marker and tail
lamps are turned off by the battery saver control, ground is supplied.
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57.
EL-65
Then the parking, license, side marker and tail lamps illuminate again.
EL-66
Schematic
Schematic =NHEL0208
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL582P
EL-67
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — NHEL0024
MEL594Q
EL-68
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL270O
EL-69
MEL271O
EL-70
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
MEL272O BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-71
SEL546Y
NOTE:
For CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure, refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-46).
For CONSULT-II Application Items, refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-47).
EL-72
Trouble Diagnoses
Trouble Diagnoses =NHEL0211
No lamps operate (including head- 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 13, located in fuse block (J/B)]. GI
lamps). 2. Lighting switch Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
MA
No parking, side marker, license 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse (No. 60, located in fuse and fusible
and tail lamps operate, but head- 2. Tail lamp relay link box). Verify battery positive voltage is present at EM
lamps do operate. 3. Tail lamp relay circuit terminals 1 and 3 of tail lamp relay.
4. Lighting switch 2. Check tail lamp relay.
5. Lighting switch circuit 3. Check harness between smart entrance control unit LC
6. Smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 and tail lamp relay terminal 2.
Check harness between tail lamp relay terminal 5
and ground.
EC
5. Check harness between lighting switch terminal 11
and smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58.
Check harness between lighting switch terminal 5 FE
and ground.
AT
Exterior lamp battery saver control 1. Door switch LH or RH circuit 1. Check the following.
does not operate properly. 2. Smart entrance control unit a. Harness between smart entrance control unit and
door switch LH or RH for open or short circuit AX
b. Door switch LH or RH ground circuit
c. Door switch LH or RH
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-73
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — NHEL0025
MEL595Q
EL-74
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL273O
EL-75
BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L — NHEL0026
MEL596Q
EL-76
FRONT FOG LAMP
System Description

OUTLINE NHEL0164S01
쐌 to headlamp LH relay terminal 3 GI
쐌 through 15A fuse (No. 68, located in the fuse and fusible link box),
MA
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)], and EM
쐌 to front fog lamp relay terminal 3
LC
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. EC
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 26 FE
쐌 through body grounds M9, M25 and M87. AT
When lighting switch is in 2ND position, ground is supplied
쐌 to headlamp LH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 21. AX
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminal 22, and
쐌 through lighting switch, and body grounds E11, E22 and E53.
Headlamp LH relay is then energized. SU
FRONT FOG LAMP OPERATION NHEL0164S02
The front fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch must be in the 2ND position BR
and LOW (“B”) position for front fog lamp operation.
With the front fog lamp switch in the ON position, ground is supplied
쐌 to front fog lamp relay terminal 2
ST
쐌 through the front fog lamp switch, lighting switch and body grounds E11, E22 and E53.
The front fog lamp relay is energized and power is supplied RS
쐌 from front fog lamp relay terminal 5
쐌 to terminal 1 of each front fog lamp.
BT
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each front fog lamp through body grounds E11, E22 and E53.
With power and ground supplied, the front fog lamps illuminate.
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL HA
NHEL0164S04
Front fog lamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned OFF (ACC OFF) from ON
(or START). SC
Continuity between terminals 21 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will be disturbed after 5 minutes, then
the headlamps will be turned off.
Then front fog lamps are turned to off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II (EL-47).
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after front fog lamps are turned off by the battery saver
control, ground is supplied IDX
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminal 60 from lighting switch terminal 12.
Then the front fog lamps illuminate again.
EL-77
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — NHEL0028
MEL597Q
EL-78
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
MEL276O BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-79
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — (Cont’d)
SEL551YA
NOTE:
Trouble Diagnoses for battery saver control, refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-47).
EL-80
FRONT FOG LAMP
Aiming Adjustment
Aiming Adjustment =NHEL0029

Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following.
1) Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure.
2) Place vehicle on level ground. GI
3) See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant,
engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the
driver or equivalent weight placed in driver’s seat. MA
Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjusting
screw.
EM
SEL643W
1. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the front LC
fog lamp lens as shown at left.
2. Remove front fog lamp rim. For detail, refer to “BODY END” in
BT section. EC
3. Turn front fog lamps ON.
FE
AT
MEL327GA
4. Adjust front fog lamps so that the top edge of the high inten- AX
sity zone is 87 mm (3.43 in) below the height of the front fog
lamp centers as shown at left.
쐌 When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the head- SU
lamps and opposite front fog lamp.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL328GC
IDX
EL-81
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
System Description

TURN SIGNAL OPERATION NHEL0030S01
With the hazard switch in the OFF position and the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is sup-
plied
쐌 to hazard switch terminal 2
쐌 through terminal 1 of the hazard switch
쐌 to combination flasher unit terminal 1
쐌 through terminal 3 of the combination flasher unit
쐌 to turn signal switch terminal 1.
Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal 2 through body grounds M9, M25 and M87.
LH Turn NHEL0030S0101
When the turn signal switch is moved to the LH position, power is supplied from turn signal switch terminal 3
to
쐌 front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1
쐌 combination meter terminal 25
쐌 rear combination lamp LH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied to the front turn signal lamp LH terminal 2 through body grounds E11, E22 and E53.
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp LH terminal 2 through body grounds T6 and T8.
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M9, M25 and M87.
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the LH turn signal lamps.
RH Turn NHEL0030S0102
When the turn signal switch is moved to the RH position, power is supplied from turn signal switch terminal
2 to
쐌 front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1
쐌 rear combination lamp RH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied to the front turn signal lamp RH terminal 2 through body grounds E11, E22 and E53.
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp RH terminal 2 through body grounds T6 and T8.
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the RH turn signal lamps.
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION NHEL0030S02
Power is supplied at all times to hazard switch terminal 3 through:
쐌 15A fuse [No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
With the hazard switch in the ON position, power is supplied
쐌 through terminal 1 of the hazard switch
쐌 to combination flasher unit terminal 1
쐌 through terminal 3 of the combination flasher unit
쐌 to hazard switch terminal 4.
Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal 2 through body grounds M9, M25 and M87.
Power is supplied through terminal 5 of the hazard switch to
쐌 front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1
쐌 rear combination lamp LH terminal 1.
Power is supplied through terminal 6 of the hazard switch to
쐌 front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1
쐌 rear combination lamp RH terminal 1.
EL-82
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each front turn signal lamp through body grounds E11, E22 and E53.
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each rear combination lamp through body grounds T6 and T8.
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning
lamps. GI
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION NHEL0030S03
Power is supplied at all times MA
EM
Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminal 43 and 64.
Power is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminals 47 and 48, when the multi-remote control system LC
is triggered.
Refer to “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM”, EL-297.
When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK or UNLOCK signal from keyfob with all doors closed, power EC
is supplied
FE
쐌 to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1 and
쐌 to combination meter terminal 25 and
쐌 to rear combination lamp LH terminal 1, and AT
쐌 to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1 and
AX
쐌 to combination meter terminal 29 and
쐌 to rear combination lamp RH terminal 1
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each front turn signal lamp through body grounds E11, E22 and E53. SU
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each rear combination lamp through body grounds T6 and T8.
With power and ground supplied, the smart entrance control unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning BR
lamps.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-83
Wiring Diagram — TURN —
Wiring Diagram — TURN — NHEL0032
MEL598Q
EL-84
Wiring Diagram — TURN — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
MEL278O
SC
IDX
SEL392YB
EL-85
Trouble Diagnoses
Turn signal and hazard warning 1. Hazard switch 1. Check hazard switch.
lamps do not operate. 2. Combination flasher unit 2. Refer to combination flasher unit check.
3. Open in combination flasher unit 3. Check wiring to combination flasher unit for open
circuit circuit.
Turn signal lamps do not operate 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 26, located in fuse block (J/B)].
but hazard warning lamps operate. 2. Hazard switch Turn ignition switch ON and verify battery positive
3. Turn signal switch voltage is present at terminal 2 of hazard switch.
4. Open in turn signal switch cir- 2. Check hazard switch.
cuit 3. Check turn signal switch.
4. Check harness between combination flasher unit
terminal 3 and turn signal switch terminal 1 for open
circuit.
Hazard warning lamps do not oper- 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)].
ate but turn signal lamps operate. 2. Hazard switch Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
3. Open in hazard switch circuit 3 of hazard switch.
2. Check hazard switch.
3. Check harness between combination flasher unit
terminal 3 and hazard switch terminal 4 for open
circuit.
Front turn signal lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

does not operate. 2. Grounds E11, E22 and E53 2. Check grounds E11, E22 and E53.
3. Front turn signal lamp circuit 3. Check harness between combination switch and
front turn signal lamp.
Rear turn signal lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

does not operate. 2. Grounds T6 and T8 2. Check grounds T6 and T8.
3. Rear turn signal lamp circuit. 3. Check harness between combination switch and
rear turn signal lamp.
LH and RH turn indicators do not 1. Ground 1. Check grounds M9, M25 and M87.
operate.
LH or RH turn indicator does not 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.

operate. 2. Turn indicator circuit 2. Check harness between hazard switch and combi-
nation meter.
Electrical Components Inspection NHEL0034

COMBINATION FLASHER UNIT CHECK NHEL0034S01
쐌 Before checking, ensure that bulbs meet specifications.
쐌 Connect a battery and test lamp to the combination flasher
unit, as shown. Combination flasher unit is properly function-
ing if it blinks when power is supplied to the circuit.
SEL122E
EL-86
CORNERING LAMP
System Description

The cornering lamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch and
smart entrance control unit. The battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
Power is supplied at all times GI
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 MA
When ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied EM
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied LC
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. EC
LIGHTING OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH NHEL0268S01 FE
When lighting switch is 1ST (or 2ND) position, ground is supplied
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58, and AT
Tail lamp relay is then energized. AX
The lighting switch must be in the 1ST or 2ND position for the cornering lamps to operate.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied to cornering lamp relay terminal 5
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 26, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. SU
Power is supplied to cornering lamp relay terminal 1
쐌 through tail lamp relay terminal 5, when the lighting switch in the 1st or 2ND position.
BR
Ground is supplied to cornering lamp relay terminal 2 through body grounds E11, E22 and E53.
With power and ground supplied, the cornering lamp relay is energized.
Power is supplied ST
쐌 from terminal 3 of the cornering lamp relay
쐌 to cornering lamp switch terminal 61.
RH turn
RS
When the turn signal lever is moved to the RH position, power is supplied
쐌 from terminal 61 of the cornering lamp switch BT
쐌 through terminal 62 of the cornering lamp switch
쐌 to cornering lamp RH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of cornering lamp RH through body grounds E11, E22 and E53. HA
The RH cornering lamp illuminates until the turn signal lever returns to NEUTRAL position.
LH turn
When the turn signal lever is moved to the LH position, power is supplied
SC
쐌 from terminal 61 of the cornering lamp switch
쐌 through terminal 63 of the cornering lamp switch
쐌 to cornering lamp LH terminal 1.
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of cornering lamp LH through body grounds E11, E22 and E53.
The LH cornering lamp illuminates until the turn signal lever returns to NEUTRAL position. IDX
Cornering lamp will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned ON (or START) from OFF (or
ACC).
Then cornering lamp is turned off.
EL-87
CORNERING LAMP
switch signal changes from ON (or START) to OFF (ACC OFF), and either one of front door switch LH or RH
ON signal is input.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST (or 2ND) after cornering lamp is turned off by the battery
saver control, ground is supplied
Then cornering lamp illuminates again.
EL-88
CORNERING LAMP
Wiring Diagram — CORNER —
Wiring Diagram — CORNER — NHEL0270
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL599Q
EL-89
CORNERING LAMP
Wiring Diagram — CORNER — (Cont’d)
MEL280O
EL-90
CORNERING LAMP
Wiring Diagram — CORNER — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SEL898Y
SU
NOTE: BR
Trouble Diagnoses for exterior lamp battery saver control, refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-47). ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-91
ILLUMINATION
System Description

The illumination lamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch
and smart entrance control unit. The battery saver system is controlled by smart entrance control unit.
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)], and
When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, power is supplied
LIGHTING OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH NHEL0035S01
When lighting switch is 1ST (or 2ND) position, ground is supplied
Tail lamp relay is then energized and illumination lamps illuminate.
The lighting switch must be in the 1ST or 2ND position for illumination.
The illumination control switch that controls the amount of current to the illumination system. As the amount
of current increases, the illumination becomes brighter.
The ground for all of the components except for door mirror remote control switch, clock and grove box lamp,
ashtray are controlled through terminals 2 and 3 of the illumination control switch and body grounds M9, M25
and M87.
Illumination lamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned ON (or START) from OFF
(or ACC).
be disturbed after 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off.
Then illumination lamps are turned off.
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II (EL-47).
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST (or 2ND) after illumination lamps are turned off by the
battery saver control, ground is supplied
Then illumination lamps illuminate again.
EL-92
ILLUMINATION
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0036
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL281O
EL-93
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —
Wiring Diagram — ILL — NHEL0037
MEL600Q
EL-94
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL601Q
EL-95
ILLUMINATION
MEL602Q
EL-96
ILLUMINATION
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL285O
EL-97
ILLUMINATION
MEL286O
EL-98
ILLUMINATION
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL548YA
ST
NOTE:
For CONSULT-II Application Items, refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-47). RS
Trouble Diagnoses for exterior lamp battery saver control, refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-47).
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-99
INTERIOR, STEP, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS
System Description

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND NHEL0165S01
Power is supplied at all times:
쐌 to key switch terminal 3 and
When the key is removed from ignition key cylinder, power is interrupted:
쐌 through key switch terminal 4
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
Ground is supplied:
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 43 and 64
쐌 through body grounds terminals M9, M25 and M87.
When the front driver side door is opened, ground is supplied:
쐌 through body grounds B7 (with TCS) or B78 (with VDC) and B46 (with rear sunshade) or B12 (without
rear sunshade)
쐌 to front door switch LH terminal 3
쐌 from front door switch LH terminal 2
When the front passenger side door is opened, ground is supplied:
쐌 through body grounds B106 and B127
쐌 to front door switch RH terminal 3
쐌 from front door switch RH terminal 2
When any other door (except front door) is opened, ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit termi-
nal 3 in the same manner as the front door switch.
When the front driver side door is unlocked by the central switch, the smart entrance control unit receives a
ground signal:
쐌 through body grounds terminals M9, M25 and M87
쐌 to front power window main switch terminal 5 or
쐌 to front power window switch RH terminal 7
쐌 from front power window main switch terminal 8 or
쐌 from front power window switch RH terminal 11
When the front driver side door is unlocked by the front door key cylinder switch, the smart entrance control
unit receives a ground signal:
쐌 through body grounds terminals M9, M25 and M87
쐌 to front door key cylinder switch LH terminal 2
쐌 from front door key cylinder switch LH terminal 1
쐌 to front power window main switch terminal 19
쐌 from front power window main switch terminal 8
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the smart entrance control unit, ground is supplied:
쐌 to interior lamp terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the interior lamp illuminates.
SWITCH OPERATION NHEL0165S02
When interior lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied:
쐌 through case grounds of interior lamp
EL-100
쐌 to interior lamp.
And power is supplied:
쐌 to interior lamp terminal 1
쐌 from smart entrance control unit terminal 50. GI
When spot lamp (LH and/or RH) is ON, ground is supplied:
쐌 through body grounds M9, M25 and M87
쐌 to spot lamp terminal 2.
MA
쐌 to spot lamp terminal 1 EM
쐌 from smart entrance control unit terminal 50.
When vanity mirror illumination (LH and/or RH) is ON, ground is supplied:
LC
쐌 through body grounds M9, M25 and M87
쐌 to vanity mirror illuminations (LH and RH) terminals 2.
And power is supplied: EC
쐌 to vanity mirror illuminations (LH and RH) terminals 1
FE
When rear door switch LH and/or RH is ON (door is opened), the smart entrance control unit receives a ground
signal:
쐌 through case ground of the each rear door switch AT
쐌 from the each rear door switch terminal 1
AX
쐌 from smart entrance control unit terminal 32
쐌 to from front step lamp LH and RH terminal 1.
And power is supplied: SU
쐌 to front step lamp LH and RH terminals 2
BR
When front door switch LH and/or RH is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied:
쐌 through body grounds B7 (with TCS) or B78 (with VDC) and B12 (without rear sunshade) or B46 (with
rear sunshade), and/or B106 and B127 ST
쐌 to the front door switch (LH and RH) terminal 3
쐌 from the front door switch (LH and RH) terminal 2
RS
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 1 and/or 2
쐌 to front step lamp LH and RH terminals 1. BT
쐌 to front step lamp LH and RH terminals 2
HA
When trunk room lamp switch is ON (trunk lid is opened), ground is supplied:
쐌 through body grounds T6 and T8 SC
쐌 to trunk room lamp switch terminal 2
쐌 from trunk room lamp switch terminal 1
쐌 to trunk room lamp terminal 1
쐌 to trunk room lamp terminal 2 IDX
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 13 located in the fuse block (J/B)].
With power and ground supplied, interior lamps turn ON.
INTERIOR LAMP TIMER OPERATION NHEL0165S03
When interior lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position, the smart entrance control unit keeps the interior lamp
illuminated for about 30 seconds when:
쐌 unlock signal is supplied from driver’s door lock and unlock switch while all doors are closed and key is
out of ignition key cylinder
EL-101
쐌 unlock signal is supplied from keyfob or door key cylinder while driver’s door is locked and all doors are
closed
쐌 key is removed from ignition key cylinder while all doors are closed
쐌 driver’s door is opened and then closed while key is out of the iginition key cylinder. (However, if the driv-
er’s door is closed with the key inserted in the ignition key cylinder after the driver’s door is opened with
the key removed, the timer is operated.)
The timer is canceled when:
쐌 driver’s door is locked,
쐌 driver’s door is opened, or
쐌 ignition switch is turned ON.
When driver’s door is locked, interior room lamp timer is canceled as described before.
However, ignition key hole illumination remains on for about 30 seconds after driver’s door has been locked.
ON-OFF CONTROL NHEL0165S04
When the driver side door, front passenger door, rear LH or RH door is opened, the interior room lamp turns
on while the interior room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position.
When any door is opened, step lamps turn ON.
INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL NHEL0165S05
The lamp turns off automatically when interior lamp, step lamp, spot lamp and/or vanity mirror illumination is
illuminated with the ignition key is in OFF position, if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open signal or if
the lamp switch is in ON position for more than 10 minutes.
After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when:
쐌 driver’s door is locked or unlocked,
쐌 door is opened or closed,
쐌 key is removed from ignition key cylinder or inserted in ignition key cylinder
Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II (EL-110).
EL-102
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0212
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL287O
EL-103
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — NHEL0163
MEL603Q
EL-104
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL289O
EL-105
MEL382O
EL-106
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL290O
EL-107
SEL577YA
EL-108
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure =NHEL0213

“INT LAMP”/“BATTERY SAVER” NHEL0213S01
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to GI
MA
EM
SEF289X
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. LC

EC
FE
AT
SKIA3098E
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”. AX

SU
BR
ST
SEL398Y
RS
6. Touch “INT LAMP” or “BATTERY SAVER”.
BT
HA
SC
SEL399Y

are available for “INT LAMP” and “BATTERY SAVER”. IDX
SEL400Y
EL-109

“INT LAMP” NHEL0214S01
IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.
DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.
LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door lock switch.
UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door lock switch.
KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door key cylinder switch.
KEY CYL UN-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door key cylinder switch.
LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from remote controller.
UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from remote controller.
Active Test NHEL0214S0102
INT LAMP This test enables to check interior lamp operation.

When “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched:
쐌 Interior lamp turns on when the switch is at DOOR.
(Smart entrance control unit supplies power and ground to interior lamp.)
IGN ILLUM This test enables to check ignition key hole illumination operation. The illumination turns on when
“ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
STEP LAMP This test enables to check step lamp operation.

The illumination turns on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
Work Support NHEL0214S0103
Interior lamp timer mode can be changed by mode setting. Selects ON-OFF of the room lamp
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET
illumination at the time the driver door is unlocked.
“BATTERY SAVER” NHEL0214S02

DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.
LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door lock switch.
UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door lock switch.
KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door key cylinder switch.
EL-110
CONSULT-II Application Items (Cont’d)
KEY CYL UN-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door key cylinder switch.
LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from remote controller. GI

Active Test MA
NHEL0214S0202

EM
BATTERY SAVER This test enables to check interior lamp, front step lamps, spot lamp, vanity mirror illuminations
and trunk room lamp operations.
When touch “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. LC
쐌 Interior lamp turns on when the switch is in ON.
(Smart entrance control unit supplies power to interior lamp.)
쐌 Front step lamps turn on when any doors are open.
(Smart entrance control unit supplies power to front step lamps.)
EC
쐌 Spot lamp, vanity mirror illuminations, trunk room lamp turn on when the switch is in ON.
(Smart entrance control unit supplies power to Spot lamp, vanity mirror illuminations, trunk
room lamp.) FE

AT
Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by mode setting. Selects interior lamp AX
ROOM LAMP BAT SAV SET battery saver control period between two modes.
쐌 MODE 1 (30 minutes)/MODE 2 (60 minutes)
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-111
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer =NHEL0215

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 NHEL0215S01
SYMPTOM: Interior lamp timer does not operate.
1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL318W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 27 (G) and ground.
SEL003Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
NG 䊳 Check the following.
쐌 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse
EL-112
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
2 CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check driver door switch signal (“DOOR SW-DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL319WA
Without CONSULT-II
EC
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 1 (LG) and ground.
FE
AT
AX
SU
SEL004YC
OK or NG BR
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
NG 䊳 GO TO 3.
ST
3 CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH
RS
Check continuity between front door switch LH connector B29 terminals 2 and 3.
BT
HA
SC
SEL325WB
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check the following. IDX
쐌 Front door switch LH ground circuit and condition
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front door switch
LH
NG 䊳 Replace front door switch LH.
EL-113
4 CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH RH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check front door switch RH signal (“DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL153Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 2 (R/L) and ground.
SEL152Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 6.
NG 䊳 GO TO 5.
5 CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH RH

Check continuity between front door switch RH connector B129 terminals 2 and 3.
SEL325WC
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check the following.
쐌 Front door switch RH ground circuit and condition
RH
NG 䊳 Replace front door switch RH.
EL-114
6 CHECK REAR DOOR SWITCHES LH AND RH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-RR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL154Y
Without CONSULT-II
EC
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminals 3 (R/W) and ground.
FE
AT
AX
SU
SEL155Y
OK or NG BR
OK 䊳 GO TO 8.
NG 䊳 GO TO 7.
ST
7 CHECK REAR DOOR SWITCHES LH AND RH
RS
1. Disconnect rear door switch LH and/or RH harness connector.
2. Check continuity between rear door switch LH and/or RH terminal 1 and ground.
BT
HA
SC
SEL899Y
OK or NG IDX
쐌 Rear door switch LH and/or RH ground circuit or door switch ground condition
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear door switch
LH and/or RH
NG 䊳 Replace rear door switch LH and/or RH.
EL-115
8 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL315W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 25 (B/R) and ground.
SEL011Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 10.
NG 䊳 GO TO 9.
9 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)

Check continuity between key switch harness connector E154 terminals 3 and 4.
SEL549Y
OK or NG
쐌 Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
NG 䊳 Replace key switch.
EL-116
10 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL341W
Without CONSULT-II
EC
1. Remove key from ignition switch.
2. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 (L) and ground with oscillo-
scope when door lock/unlock switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”. FE
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after door lock/unlock
switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL396Y
ST
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 11.
RS
쐌 Ground circuit for each front power window switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart BT
entrance control unit connector
If above systems are normal, replace the front power window switch.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-117
11 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)

With CONSULT-II
Check front door key cylinder switch LH (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
SEL342W
Without CONSULT-II
scope when key inserted in front door key cylinder switch LH is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after key is turned “LOCK”
or “UNLOCK”.
SEL397Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG 䊳 GO TO 12.
EL-118
12 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

1. Disconnect front door key cylinder switch LH harness connector D8.
2. Check continuity between front door key cylinder switch LH terminals.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL187YB
OK or NG
EC
쐌 Front door key cylinder switch LH ground circuit FE
쐌 Harness for open or short between front power window main switch and front door key
cylinder switch LH
If above systems are normal, replace the front power window mian switch. AT
NG 䊳 Replace front door key cylinder switch LH.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-119
SYMPTOM: Interior lamp timer does not cancel properly.
With CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL318W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 27 (G) and ground.
SEL995X
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
EL-120
2 CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check driver door switch signal (“DOOR SW-DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL319WA
Without CONSULT-II
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
SEL004YC
OK or NG BR
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
NG 䊳 GO TO 3.
ST
RS
Check continuity between front door switch LH connector B29 terminals 2 and 3.
BT
HA
SC
SEL325WB
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check the following. IDX
LH
EL-121

With CONSULT-II
SEL341W
Without CONSULT-II
scope when door lock/unlock switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
SEL396Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 5.
쐌 Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart
EL-122

With CONSULT-II
Check front door key cylinder switch LH (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL342W EC
Without CONSULT-II
scope when key inserted in front door key cylinder switch LH is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”. FE
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after key is turned “LOCK”
or “UNLOCK”.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL397Y
ST
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Replace smart entrance control unit.
RS
NG 䊳 GO TO 6.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-123

1. Disconnect front door key cylinder switch LH harness connector D8.
2. Check continuity between front door key cylinder switch LH terminals.
SEL187YB
OK or NG
쐌 Front door key cylinder switch LH ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between front power window main switch and front door key
cylinder switch LH
If above systems are normal, replace the front power window main switch.
NG 䊳 Replace front door key cylinder switch LH.
EL-124
METERS AND GAUGES

Location NHEL0041
GI
MA
EM
SEL550Y
LC
EC
FE
AT
NHEL0042
UNIFIED CONTROL METER NHEL0042S06
쐌 Speedometer, odo/trip meter, tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled totally SU
by control unit built-in combination meter.
쐌 Digital meter is adopted for odo/trip meter.*
*The record of the odo meter is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter BR
is erased when the battery cable is disconnected.
쐌 Odo/trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode.
쐌 Meter/gauge can be checked in diagnosis mode.
ST
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER NHEL0042S07
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL175W
NOTE:
Turn ignition switch to the “ON” position to operate odo/trip meter.
EL-125
METERS AND GAUGES
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT NHEL0042S08
쐌 to combination meter terminal 62.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
Ground is supplied
쐌 to combination meter terminal 59
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE NHEL0042S01
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The reading on the gauge is received
engine coolant temperature signal from ECM. ECM is detected by water temperature sensor.
The water temperature gauge is received by a signal
쐌 from ECM terminal 18
쐌 to combination meter terminal 18
The needle on the gauge moves from “C” to “H”
TACHOMETER NHEL0042S02
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
The tachometer is regulated by a signal
쐌 from terminal 34 of the ECM
쐌 to combination meter terminal 16 for the tachometer.
FUEL GAUGE NHEL0042S03
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable ground signal supplied
쐌 to combination meter terminal 17 for the fuel gauge
쐌 from terminal 2 of the fuel level sensor unit
쐌 through terminal 5 of the fuel level sensor unit and
쐌 through body ground B7 (with TCS) or B78 (with VDC) and B12 (without rear sunshade) or B46 (with rear
sunshade)
SPEEDOMETER NHEL0042S04
The combination meter provides a voltage signal to the vehicle speed sensor for the speedometer.
The voltage is supplied
쐌 from combination meter terminal 15 for the speedometer
쐌 to terminal 1 of the vehicle speed sensor (with VDC)
쐌 to terminal 22 of ABS/TCS control unit (with TCS)
The speedometer converts the voltage into the vehicle speed displayed.
EL-126
METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter
Combination Meter NHEL0043

CHECK NHEL0043S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL875Q
EL-127
METERS AND GAUGES
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0293
MEL876Q
EL-128
METERS AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER —
Wiring Diagram — METER — NHEL0045
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL604Q
EL-129
METERS AND GAUGES
Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode
Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter

Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode NHEL0151
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION NHEL0151S01
쐌 Odo/trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode.
쐌 Meters/gauges can be checked in diagnosis mode.
HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE NHEL0151S02
1. Turn ignition switch to ON and change odo/trip meter to “TRIP
A”.
2. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch to ON when pushing odo/trip meter switch.
4. Release odo/trip meter switch 1 second after ignition switch is
turned ON.
5. Push odo/trip meter switch more than three times within 5
seconds.
6. All odo/trip meter segments should be turned on.

NOTE:
If some segments are not turned on, unified meter control unit with
odo/trip meter should be replaced.
At this point, the unified control meter is turned to diagnosis
mode.
SEL176W
7. Push odo/trip meter switch. Indication of each meter/gauge

should be as shown left during pushing odo/trip meter switch
if it is no malfunctioning.
NOTE:
It takes about a few seconds for indication of fuel gauge and water
temperature gauge to become stable.
SEL177W
EL-130
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses

PRELIMINARY CHECK NHEL0046S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL479Y
*1: Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/ *2: POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND *3: Symptom Chart (EL-132)
Trip Meter Segment Check in CIRCUIT CHECK (EL-133)
Diagnosis Mode (EL-130) IDX
EL-131
METERS AND GAUGES
SYMPTOM CHART NHEL0046S11
Symptom Possible causes Repair order
One of speedometer/ 1. Sensor signal 1. Check the sensor for malfunctioning meter/gauge.
tachometer/fuel gauge/ - Vehicle speed signal INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (Refer to
water temp. gauge is mal- - Engine revolution signal EL-134.)
functioning. - Fuel gauge INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL
- Water temp. gauge (Refer to EL-136.)
2. Unified meter control unit INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT (Refer to
EL-137.)
Multiple meter/gauge are Unified meter control unit INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMITTER (Refer to
malfunctioning. (except EL-138.)
odo/trip meter) 2. Replace unified meter control unit assembly.
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform PRELIMINARY

CHECK, EL-131.
EL-132
METERS AND GAUGES
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NHEL0046S07
Power Supply Circuit Check NHEL0046S0701
Terminals Ignition switch position

GI
(+) (−) OFF ACC ON
Battery Battery
31 Ground 0V
voltage voltage MA
Battery Battery Battery
62 Ground
voltage voltage voltage EM
SEL179W Battery
66 Ground 0V 0V
voltage
LC
If NG, check the following.
쐌 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)] EC
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuse and combination FE
meter
AT
SEL613Y
Ground Circuit Check AX

NHEL0046S0702
Terminals Continuity
SU
59 - Ground Yes
BR
ST
SEL180W
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-133
METERS AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL =NHEL0046S03
With VDC NHEL0046S0301
1 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT

1. Remove vehicle speed sensor from transmission.
2. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M214 terminal 15 (R) and ECM harness connector F48
terminal 58 (B) while quickly turning speed sensor pinion.
SEL181WA
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Vehicle speed sensor is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
2 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

Check resistance between vehicle speed sensor terminals 1 and 2.
SEL645W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check harness or connector between speedometer, vehicle speed sensor and ECM.
NG 䊳 Replace vehicle speed sensor.
EL-134
METERS AND GAUGES
With TCS NHEL0046S0302
1 CHECK ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Lift up drive wheels. GI
2. Start engine and drive vehicle at more than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
3. Check signal between combination meter harness connector M33 terminal 15 (R) and ground when rotating wheels
with engine at idle. (Use “SIMPLE OSCILLOSCOPE” in “SUB MODE” with CONSULT-II.) MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL938W FE
Without CONSULT-II AT
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine and drive vehicle at more than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
3. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminal 15 and ground when rotating wheels with
engine at idle.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL939W
RS
OK or NG
OK 䊳 ABS/TCS control unit is OK. BT
쐌 Harness for open or short between ABS/TCS control unit and combination meter. HA
쐌 ABS/TCS control unit. Refer to BR-61, “Wheel Sensor or Rotor”.
SC
IDX
EL-135
METERS AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL NHEL0046S02
1 CHECK ECM OUTPUT

1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M33 (with TCS) or M214 (with VDC) terminals 16 (W/G)
and ground at idle and 2,000 rpm.
SEL364WD
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Engine revolution signal is OK.
NG 䊳 Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
EL-136
METERS AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT =NHEL0046S08
1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT

Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector terminal 5 and ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL182W
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
NG 䊳 Repair harness or connector.
FE
2 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT AT

Refer to “FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK” (EL-140).
OK or NG AX
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
NG 䊳 Replace fuel level sensor unit. SU
3 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR SHORT BR

1. Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M33 (with TCS) or M214 (with VDC) terminal 17 (G)
and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector B19 terminal 2 (G). ST
Continuity should exist.
3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M33 (with TCS) or M214 (with VDC) terminal 17 (G)
and ground. RS
Continuity should not exist.
BT
HA
SC
SEL183WA
OK or NG
IDX
OK 䊳 Fuel level sensor unit is OK.
EL-137
METERS AND GAUGES
INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMITTER =NHEL0046S09
1 CHECK ECM OUTPUT

1. Disconnect combination meter.
2. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M33 (with TCS) or M214 (with VDC) terminal 18 (PU/W)
and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
SEL413Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
NG 䊳 Replace.
2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Disconnect combination meter connector and ECM connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M33 (with TCS) or M214 (with VDC) terminal 18
(PU/W) and ECM terminal 18 (PU/W).
Continuity should exist.
3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M33 (with TCS) or M214 (with VDC) terminal 18
(PU/W) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
SEL417Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Thermal transmitter is OK.
EL-138
METERS AND GAUGES
3 CHECK WATER TEMPERATURE OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. Connect combination meter connector and ECM connector.
2. Start engine.
3. Check output signal between combination meter harness connector M33 (with TCS) or M214 (with VDC) terminal 18 GI
(PU/W) and ground. (Use “SIMPLE OSCILLOSCOPE” in “SUB MODE” with CONSULT-II.)
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL414Y
OK or NG
FE
OK 䊳 Replace combination meter.
NG 䊳 Check ECM.
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-139
METERS AND GAUGES
Electrical Components Inspection
Electrical Components Inspection =NHEL0047

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK NHEL0047S01
쐌 For removal, refer to FE-6, “REMOVAL”.
Check the resistance between terminals 2 and 5.
Ohmmeter Resistance
Float position mm (in)
(+) (−) value Ω
*1 Full 158 (6.22) Approx. 4.5 - 5.5
2 5 *2 1/2 89.7 (3.531) 31.5 - 33.5

MEL372K
*3 Empty 22.1 (0.870) 80.0 - 80.3
*1 and *3: When float rod is in contact with stopper.
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK NHEL0047S03

1. Remove vehicle speed sensor from transmission.
2. Turn vehicle speed sensor pinion quickly and measure voltage
across 1 and 2.
CEL219AA
EL-140
BOARD COMPUTER
System Description

FUNCTION NHEL0318S01
This board computer can indicate following items.
쐌 Outside air temperature GI
쐌 Range (Cruising possible distance)
쐌 Journey time (hour meter)
MA
쐌 Average fuel consumption
쐌 Average vehicle speed
Outside air temperature indication EM
쐌 This indicator shows indication of outside air temperature while ignition switch is in ON position.
쐌 Ambient sensor is used commonly by auto air conditioner and this board computer. When auto air condi-
tioner operates, board computer will correct ambient sensor signal based on positive voltage signal to ter-
LC
minal 56 of board computer from A/C auto amp.
쐌 Indication range is between −30 and +55°C (−22 and 131°F). (When outside temperature is less than EC
−30°C (−22°F) or more than +55°C (131°F), display shows “- - - -”.)
쐌 When outside temperature is less than 3°C (37°F) continuously, display will blink as a warning. In this case,
the display will change to the OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE mode even though the display is showing FE
a different item. (See NOTE.)
쐌 The indicated temperature is not affected by engine heat. It changes only when one of the following con-
dition exists. AT
a) When vehicle speed is more than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
b) The ignition key has been turned to OFF position for more than 3.5 hours. AX
c) When outside temperature is lower than indicated temperature.
Range (Cruising possible distance) indication
쐌 The range indication provides driver with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refuel- SU
ing. The range is conducted by fuel tank gauge unit (fuel remaining), ECM pulse signal (fuel consump-
tion) and vehicle speed signal.
쐌 Indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds.
BR
쐌 When fuel remaining is less than approx. 10.8 (11-3/8 US qt, 9-1/2 Imp qt), indication will blink as a
warning. If the fuel remaining less than approx. 10.5 (11-1/8 US qt, 9-1/4 Imp qt), indication will show “- ST
- - -”. In this case, the display will change to the RANGE mode automatically even though the display is
showing a different item. (See NOTE.)
Average fuel consumption RS
쐌 Average fuel consumption indication is conducted by ECM pulse signal and vehicle speed signal after
system is reset.
쐌 Indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds.
BT
쐌 After reset operation, the display shows “....” until the vehicle is driven 500 m (1,600 ft) and 30 seconds
has passed. HA
Average vehicle speed
쐌 Average vehicle speed indication is conducted by running distance and running time.
쐌 Indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds. SC
쐌 After reset operation, the displays shows “....” for 30 seconds.
Journey time
쐌 Journey time indication is conducted by integration of ignition ON time.
HOW TO CHANGE/RESET INDICATION NHEL0318S02 IDX
쐌 Indication can be changed by in following order by pushing board computer steering switch “TRIP”.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE , RANGE , AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION , AVERAGE VEHICLE
SPEED , JOURNEY TIME
쐌 Continuous pushing the switch (more than 0.8 second) can reset the indication of journey time (hour
meter), average vehicle speed and average fuel consumption.
NOTE:
쐌 After the display changes automatically, the indication can be changed to the last mode by push-
ing the board computer steering switch. In this case, the cursor (“왖”) will blink as a warning.
EL-141
BOARD COMPUTER
쐌 When the OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE warning and the RANGE warning match warning condi-
tions at the same time, the display automatically indicates the OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE.
EL-142
BOARD COMPUTER
Wiring Diagram — B/COMP —
Wiring Diagram — B/COMP — NHEL0319
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL605Q
EL-143
BOARD COMPUTER
Wiring Diagram — B/COMP — (Cont’d)
MEL606Q
EL-144
BOARD COMPUTER
Trouble Diagnoses

SEGMENT CHECK NHEL0320S01
Board computer display segment can be checked by the procedure shown below.
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position with pushing board computer steering switch “TRIP”. Then segment GI
check will start.
2. Segment check will end after 1 cycle of segment check is performed or any of following conditions exists.
쐌 Ignition switch is returned to ACC or OFF position.
MA
쐌 Vehicle speed signal is input.
PRELIMINARY CHECK EM
NHEL0320S02
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL831W BT
*1 EL-145 *2 EL-130
HA
DIAGNOSES PROCEDURE NHEL0320S03

SC
Outside air temperature is 1. Ambient sensor 1. Check ambient sensor. Refer to “Electrical Compo-
not displayed properly. 2. Ambient sensor circuit nents Inspection”, EL-146.
(It may take a short time to 3. A/C on signal 2. Check harness for open or short between ambient
steady the indication after 4. Vehicle speed sensor signal sensor and board computer.
ignition switch is turned to 3. Verify more than 4V is present at terminal 58 of
IDX
ON.) board computer when A/C is operated.
4. Make sure journey distance (trip) is displayed prop-
erly. If NG, check journey distance (trip) display.
Range (Cruising possible 1. Average fuel consumption display 1. Make sure fuel consumption is displayed properly. If
distance) is not displayed 2. Fuel tank gauge signal circuit NG, check fuel consumption display.
properly. 2. Make sure fuel gauge operates properly. If NG,
check fuel gauge. Refer to EL-137.
EL-145
BOARD COMPUTER
Journey time (hour meter) 1. 10A fuse 1. 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
is not indicated properly. Verify battery voltage is present at terminal 62 of
combination meter.
Average fuel consumption Fuel consumption signal Check harness for open or short between ECM termi-
is not displayed properly. nals (20, 34) and combination meter terminals (20, 16).
Average vehicle speed is Journey time (hour meter) display Make sure journey time is displayed properly. If NG,
not indicated properly. check journey time display.

AMBIENT SENSOR NHEL0321S01
The ambient sensor is attached to the radiator core support. It
detects ambient temperature and converts it into a resistance value
which is then input to A/C auto amp. and board computer.
After disconnecting ambient sensor harness connector, measure
resistance between terminals 1 and 2, using the table below.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
−15 (5) 12.73

RHA459E
−10 (14) 9.92
−5 (23) 7.80
0 (32) 6.19
5 (41) 4.95
10 (50) 3.99
15 (59) 3.24
20 (68) 2.65
25 (77) 2.19
30 (86) 1.81
35 (95) 1.51
40 (104) 1.27
45 (113) 1.07
EL-146
COMPASS
System Description

This unit displays earth magnetism and heading direction of
vehicle.
DIRECTION DISPLAY GI
NHEL0307S02
Push the “COMP” switch when the ignition key is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position. The direction will be displayed.
Pushing the “COMP” switch a second time will turn off the display. MA
1. If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by driving the
vehicle in 3 complete circles at less than 5 MPH. EM
SEL159Y 2. To adjust for Compass Variance:
a. Press the “COMP” button for more than 3 seconds. The cur-
rent zone number will appear in the display. LC
b. Find your current location and variance zone number on the
zone map.
c. Press the “COMP” button until the new zone number appears
EC
in the display. After you stop pressing the button in, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
FE
NOTE:
1) Do not install the ski rack, antenna, etc. which are attached to
the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the operation AT
of the compass.
2) If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after
repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an autho- AX
rized dealer.
3) The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in
tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. SU
(The compass returns to the correct compass point when the
vehicle moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabi-
lized.) BR
3. Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar mate- ST
rial dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to
enter the mirror housing. RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-147
COMPASS
“C” is displayed in the compass window.
The compass needs to be calibrated. Drive the vehicle in 3
circles at 5 MPH or less until the display reads a direction. You
can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your
everyday routine. The compass will be calibrated once it has
tracked 3 complete circles.
Inaccurate compass direction
a. With the display turned on, push the “COMP” button for 3
seconds, until the Zone selection comes up (a number will be
displayed in the mirror compass window).
b. Toggle until correct zone is found and release switch.
c. The display will show all segments, and return to the normal
compass mode within 10 seconds of no switch activity.
d. If the vehicle changes zone, repeat steps 1 thru 3. See map.
SEL168Y
EL-148
COMPASS
Wiring Diagram — COMPAS —
Wiring Diagram — COMPAS — NHEL0308
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL607Q
EL-149
WARNING LAMPS
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0049
MEL608Q
EL-150
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —
Wiring Diagram — WARN — NHEL0050
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL296O
EL-151
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)
MEL609Q
EL-152
WARNING LAMPS
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL610Q
EL-153
WARNING LAMPS
MEL611Q
EL-154
WARNING LAMPS
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL612Q
EL-155
WARNING LAMPS
MEL613Q
EL-156
WARNING LAMPS
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
MEL614Q
SC
IDX
SEL976XB
EL-157
WARNING LAMPS
Electrical Components Inspection
Electrical Components Inspection =NHEL0051

FUEL WARNING LAMP OPERATION CHECK NHEL0051S01
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness con-
nector B19.
3. Connect a resistor (80Ω) between fuel level sensor unit and
fuel pump harness connector terminals 2 and 5.
The fuel warning lamp should come on.
SEL185W NOTE:
ECM might store the 1st trip DTC P0180 and the 1st trip DTC
P0464 during this inspection.
If the DTC is stored in ECM memory, erase the DTC after recon-
necting fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
Refer to EC-89, “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAG-
NOSTIC INFORMATION”.
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK NHEL0051S02
Oil pressure
Continuity
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
More than 10 - 20
Engine running No
(0.1 - 0.2, 1 - 3)
Less than 10 - 20
Engine not running Yes
(0.1 - 0.2, 1 - 3)
Check the continuity between the terminals of oil pressure switch

MEL425F and body ground.
DIODE CHECK NHEL0051S03
쐌 Check continuity using an ohmmeter.
쐌 Diode is functioning properly if test results are as shown in the
figure at left.
쐌 Check diodes at the combination meter harness connector
instead of on the combination meter assembly. Refer to
EL-151, “WARNING LAMP” wiring diagrams.
NOTE:
Specification may vary depending on the type of tester. Before
performing this inspection, be sure to refer to the instruction
SEL901F manual for the tester to be used.
EL-158
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND — NHEL0159
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL615Q
EL-159
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram — AT/IND — (Cont’d)
MEL616Q
EL-160
WARNING CHIME

Location NHEL0052
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL052YA
NHEL0053
The warning chime is controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
The warning chime is located in the smart entrance control unit. SU
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 and BR
쐌 to key switch terminal 3,
ST
쐌 to tail lamp relay terminals 1 and 3.
쐌 through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] RS
Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminal 43 and 64 through body grounds M9, M25 and M87. BT
When a signal, or combination of signals, is received by the smart entrance control unit, the warning chime
will sound.
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME HA
NHEL0053S01
With the key in the ignition switch in the OFF position, and the driver’s door open, the warning chime will sound.
Power is supplied
SC
쐌 from key switch terminal 4
Ground is supplied
쐌 from front door switch (LH) terminal 2
IDX
Front door switch (LH) terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B7 (with TCS) or B78 (with VDC) and
B12 (without rear sunshade) or B46 (with rear sunshade).
LIGHT WARNING CHIME NHEL0053S02
With ignition switch OFF, driver’s door open, and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position, warning chime will
sound. Power is supplied.
쐌 from tail lamp relay terminal 2
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 19 and 57.
Ground is supplied
EL-161
WARNING CHIME
쐌 from front door switch (LH) terminal 2
Front door switch (LH) terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B7 (with TCS) or B78 (with VDC) and
B12 (without rear sunshade) or B46 (with rear sunshade).
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME NHEL0053S03
With ignition switch turned ON and seat belt unfastened (seat belt switch ON), warning chime will sound for
approximately 6 seconds.
Ground is supplied
쐌 from seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1
Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B7 (with TCS) or B78 (with VDC)
and B12 (without rear sunshade) or B46 (with rear sunshade).
EL-162
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —
Wiring Diagram — CHIME — NHEL0054
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL308O
EL-163
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME — (Cont’d)
MEL617Q
EL-164
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL578Y
EL-165
WARNING CHIME

“KEY WARN ALM”/“LIGHT WARN ALM”/“SEAT BELT
ALM” NHEL0216S01
SEF289X

SKIA3098E

SEL398Y
6. Touch “KEY WARN ALM”, “LIGHT WARN ALM” or “SEAT BELT

ALM”.
SEL023X
쐌 DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the warn-
ing chime.
SEL322W
EL-166
WARNING CHIME

“KEY WARN ALARM” NHEL0217S01
GI

MA
DOOR SW DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

EM

LC
This test is able to check key warning chime operation. Key warning chime sounds for 2
CHIME
when touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. EC
“LIGHT WARN ALM” NHEL0217S02
Data Monitor FE
NHEL0217S0201

AT
LIGHT SW 1ST Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lighting switch.

AX

SU
This test is able to check light warning chime operation. Light warning chime sounds for 2 BR
CHIME
when touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
“SEAT BELT ALM” ST

NHEL0217S03

RS
BT
SEAT BELT SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of seat belt buckle switch LH.
Active Test NHEL0217S0302 HA

CHIME
This test is able to check seat belt warning chime operation. Seat belt warning chime SC
sounds when touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
IDX
EL-167
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 168 170 171 172 173
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
(LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT
GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
(KEY SWITCH INSERT

POWER SUPPLY AND
(SEAT BELT BUCKLE

SWITCH CHECK)
SIGNAL CHECK)
SIGNAL CHECK)
SYMPTOM
Light warning chime does not acti-

X X X
vate.
Ignition key warning chime does not

X X X
activate.
Seat belt warning chime does not

X X X
activate.
All warning chimes do not activate. X X
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0055S02

Terminals
Voltage
(Wire color)
49 (R/B) - Ground Battery voltage
SEL989X
EL-168
WARNING CHIME
Ground Circuit Check NHEL0055S0202
Terminals
Continuity
(Wire color)
43 (B) - Ground Yes

GI
64 (B) - Ground Yes
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL990X
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-169
WARNING CHIME
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (LIGHTING SWITCH
INPUT SIGNAL CHECK) =NHEL0055S03
1 CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check lighting switch (“LIGHT SW 1ST”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL991X
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 19 (Y/B), connector M145 terminal
57 (Y/B) and ground.
SEL654Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Lighting switch is OK.
쐌 10A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and tail lamp relay
EL-170
WARNING CHIME
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (KEY SWITCH INSERT
SIGNAL CHECK) =NHEL0055S04

With CONSULT-II
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL315W
Without CONSULT-II FE
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 25 (B/R) and ground.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL011Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Key switch is OK.
ST
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
RS
Check continuity between key switch harness connector E154 terminals 3 and 4. BT
HA
SC
SEL549YA IDX
OK or NG
EL-171
WARNING CHIME
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH CHECK) =NHEL0055S05
1 CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check seat belt buckle switch LH (“SEAT BELT SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL317WA
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 28 (OR) and ground.
SEL994XB
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Seat belt buckle switch LH is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
2 CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH

Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH terminals 1 and 2 when seat belt is fastened and unfastened.
SEL313W
OK or NG
쐌 Seat belt buckle switch LH ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and seat belt buckle
switch LH
NG 䊳 Replace seat belt buckle switch LH.
EL-172
WARNING CHIME

With CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL318W EC
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 27 (G) and ground. FE
AT
AX
SU
SEL995X
BR
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
ST
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-173
WARNING CHIME
2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check front door switch LH signal (“DOOR SW-DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL319W
Without CONSULT-II
SEL004YC
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
NG 䊳 GO TO 3.

Check continuity between front door switch LH terminals 2 and 3.
SEL325WF
OK or NG
LH
EL-174
WARNING CHIME
4 CHECK WARNING CHIME

With CONSULT-II
Perform “CHIME” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL320W
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 System is OK.
NG 䊳 Replace smart entrance control unit. FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-175
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
System Description

WIPER OPERATION NHEL0057S01
The front wiper switch is controlled by a lever built into the combination switch.
There are three wiper switch positions:
쐌 LO speed
쐌 HI speed
쐌 INT (Intermittent)
쐌 to front wiper motor terminal 4.
쐌 to front wiper switch terminal 15.
Low (Mist) and High Speed Wiper Operation NHEL0057S0101
Ground is supplied to front wiper switch terminal 17 through body grounds E11, E22 and E53.
When the front wiper switch is placed in the LO or MIST position, ground is supplied
쐌 through terminal 14 of the front wiper switch
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at low speed.
When the front wiper switch is placed in the HI position, ground is supplied
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at high speed.
Auto Stop Operation NHEL0057S0102
With front wiper switch turned OFF, front wiper motor will continue to operate until wiper arms reach windshield
base.
When wiper arms are not located at base of windshield with front wiper switch OFF, ground is provided
쐌 from terminal 14 of the front wiper switch
쐌 to front wiper motor terminal 3, in order to continue front wiper motor operation at low speed.
쐌 to front wiper motor terminal 2
쐌 through terminal 6 of the front wiper motor, and
When wiper arms reach base of windshield, front wiper motor terminals 2 and 4 are connected instead of ter-
minals 2 and 6. Front wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the STOP position.
Intermittent Operation NHEL0057S0103
The front wiper motor operates the wiper arms one time at low speed at a set interval of approximately 3 to
13 seconds. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier (INT SW) combined with front wiper switch.
When the front wiper switch is placed in the INT position, ground is supplied to wiper amplifier.
The desired interval time is input to wiper amplifier (INT VR) from wiper volume switch combined with front
wiper switch.
Then intermittent ground is supplied
쐌 to front wiper motor terminal 3
쐌 from terminal 14 of front wiper switch
쐌 through wiper amplifier (OUTPUT).
The front wiper motor operates at low speed at the desired interval.
WASHER OPERATION NHEL0057S02
쐌 to front washer motor terminal 1.
When the lever is pulled to the WASH position, ground is supplied
쐌 to front washer motor terminal 2, and
EL-176
쐌 from terminal 18 of the front wiper switch
쐌 through terminal 17 of the front wiper switch, and
With power and ground supplied, the front washer motor operates. GI
When the lever is pulled to the WASH position for one second or more, the front wiper motor operates at low
speed for approximately 3 seconds to clean windshield. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier in the
same manner as the intermittent operation. MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-177
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —
Wiring Diagram — WIPER — NHEL0058
MEL310O
EL-178
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation NHEL0060

WIPER ARMS NHEL0060S01
1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on front wiper switch to
operate front wiper motor and then turn it “OFF” (Auto Stop). GI
2. Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set
the blade center to clearance “L1” & “L2” immediately before
tightening nut. MA
3. Eject washer fluid. Turn on front wiper switch to operate front
wiper motor and then turn it “OFF”.
4. Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance “L1” & “L2”.
EM
SEL543TA
Clearance “L1”: 48 - 64 mm (1.89 - 2.52 in)
Clearance “L2”: 40 - 56 mm (1.57 - 2.20 in) LC
쐌 Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque.
Front wiper: 21 - 26 N·m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m, 16 - 19 ft-lb)
EC
FE
AT
쐌 Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as AX

illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm loose-
ness.
SU
BR
ST
SEL024J
RS
WIPER LINKAGE NHEL0060S02
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL063R
EL-179
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
Removal NHEL0060S0201
1. Remove 4 bolts that secure front wiper motor.
2. Detach front wiper motor from wiper linkage at ball joint.
3. Remove wiper linkage.
Be careful not to break ball joint rubber boot.
Installation NHEL0060S0202
쐌 Grease ball joint portion before installation.
1. Installation is the reverse order of removal.
Washer Nozzle Adjustment NHEL0061

쐌 Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure
at left.
Adjustable range: ±10°
SEL241P
Unit: mm (in)
*1 341 (13.43) *5 154 (6.06)
*2 286 (11.26) *6 203 (7.99)
*3 285 (11.22) *7 382 (15.04)
*4 152 (5.98) *8 385 (15.16)
*: The diameters of these circles are less than 80 mm (3.15 in).
SEL544T
Washer Tube Layout NHEL0062
MEL377K
EL-180
HORN
Wiring Diagram — HORN —
Wiring Diagram — HORN — NHEL0071
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL311O
EL-181
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR — NHEL0156
MEL312O
EL-182
CLOCK
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK — NHEL0166
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL466K
EL-183
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

Location NHEL0072
SEL051Y

The rear window defogger system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit. The rear window defogger
operates only for approximately 15 minutes.
쐌 to rear window defogger relay terminal 3
쐌 through 20A fuse [No. 7, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and
쐌 to rear window defogger relay terminal 6
쐌 to the rear window defogger relay terminal 1 and
Ground is supplied to terminal 32 of the rear window defogger switch (built-in A/C auto amp.) through body
grounds M9, M25 and M87.
When the rear defogger switch is turned ON, ground is supplied
쐌 through terminal 31 of the rear window defogger switch
Terminal 37 of the smart entrance control unit then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay termi-
nal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized.
Power is supplied
쐌 through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay
쐌 to the rear window defogger and
쐌 to terminal 30 of the A/C auto amp.
The rear window defogger has an independent ground.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window.
When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger
switch.
EL-184
Wiring Diagram — DEF —
Wiring Diagram — DEF — =NHEL0074
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL618Q
EL-185
Wiring Diagram — DEF — (Cont’d)
MEL118N
SEL978XB
EL-186

“REAR DEFOGGER” NHEL0218S01
MA
EM
SEF289X

EC
FE
AT
SKIA3098E

SU
BR
ST
SEL398Y
RS
6. Touch “REAR DEFOGGER”.
BT
HA
SC
SEL023X

“DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available.
IDX
SEL322W
EL-187

“REAR DEFOGGER” NHEL0219S01
REAR DEF SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear window defogger switch.
This test is able to check rear window defogger operation. Rear window defogger activates
REAR DEFOGGER
when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
EL-188
Trouble Diagnoses

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NHEL0075S01
SYMPTOM: Rear window defogger does not activate, or does
not go off after activating. GI
1 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OUTPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II MA
Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “REAR DEFOGGER” with CONSULT-II.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL353W
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. AT
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 37 (G/R) and ground.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL997X
OK or NG
RS
쐌 Rear window defogger relay
(Refer to EL-192.) BT
쐌 Rear window defogger circuit
쐌 Rear window defogger filament
(Refer to EL-192.) HA
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
SC
IDX
EL-189
2 CHECK DEFOGGER RELAY COIL SIDE CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
3. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 37 (G/R) and ground.
SEL998X
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
쐌 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Rear window defogger relay
쐌 Harness for open or short between 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
and rear window defogger relay
쐌 Harness for open or short between rear window defogger relay and smart entrance
control unit
EL-190
3 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Select “REAR DEF SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL352W
Without CONSULT-II
EC
Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 14 (G/W) and ground.
FE
AT
AX
SU
SEL999X
OK or NG BR
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
1. Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear window
ST
defogger switch
2. Rear window defogger switch ground circuit
3. Replace rear window defogger switch.
RS
4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND IGNITION INPUT SIGNAL BT

Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 27 (G), M145 terminal 49 (R/B) and
ground. HA
SC
IDX
SEL001Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 5.
쐌 10A fuse [No. 10 or No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
EL-191
5 CHECK CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 43 (B), M145 terminal 64 (B) and
ground.
SEL002Y
Yes 䊳 Replace smart entrance control unit.

No 䊳 Repair harness or connectors.

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY NHEL0076S01
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
Condition Continuity
12V direct current supply between ter-

Yes
minals 1 and 2
No current supply No
SEC202B
Filament Check NHEL0077

1. Attach probe circuit tester (in volt range) to middle portion of
each filament.
SEL263
쐌 When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of

the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire
with your finger.
SEL122R
EL-192
Filament Check (Cont’d)
2. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or 12 volts.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL265
3. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along AX
filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes
the point.
SU
BR
ST
SEL266
RS
Filament Repair NHEL0078
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
1)
NHEL0078S01
Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent) BT
2) Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
3) Drawing pen HA
4) Heat gun
5) Alcohol
6) Cloth SC
REPAIRING PROCEDURE NHEL0078S02

1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
cloth dampened in alcohol. IDX
2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
Shake silver composition container before use.
3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive sil-
ver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap
existing heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of
the break.
BE540
EL-193
Filament Repair (Cont’d)
4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for con-
tinuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
SEL012D
5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area

for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum dis-
tance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area
and hot air outlet. If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired
area dry for 24 hours.
SEL013D
EL-194
AUDIO
System Description

Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating instructions.
쐌 through 15A fuse (No. 56, located in the fuse and fusible link box) GI
쐌 to BOSE speaker amp. terminal 27, and
쐌 to CD auto changer terminal 3 (with CD auto changer)
쐌 to audio unit terminal 6. MA
쐌 to woofer terminal 48. EM
쐌 to CD auto changer terminal 1 (with CD auto changer) LC
쐌 to audio unit terminal 10.
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit. EC
Ground is supplied
쐌 to BOSE speaker amp. terminal 40, and
쐌 to woofer terminal 47 FE
쐌 through body grounds B106 and B127
쐌 to CD auto changer terminal 7 (with CD auto changer) AT
rear sunshade).
When the audio unit POWER button is pressed, power is supplied to BOSE speaker amp. terminal 25 and AX
woofer terminal 45 from audio unit terminal 12.
CD (audio) signals are supplied (with CD auto changer)
쐌 through CD auto changer terminals 16, 6, 15 and 5
SU
쐌 to terminals 41, 42, 43 and 44 of the audio unit.
Audio signals are supplied BR
쐌 through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16
쐌 to BOSE speaker amp. terminals 20, 33, 22, 35, 21, 34, 23 and 36
ST
쐌 through audio unit terminal 12
쐌 to BOSE speaker amp. terminal 25 and
쐌 to woofer terminal 45. RS
Audio signals are amplified by the BOSE speaker amp.
The amplified audio signals are supplied
쐌 through BOSE speaker amp. terminals 30, 31, 28, 29, 18, 17, 41 and 42
BT
쐌 to terminals 1 and 2 of the front door speaker LH and RH
쐌 to terminals 1 and 2 of the tweeter LH and RH HA
쐌 to terminals 1 and 2 of the rear door speaker LH and RH
쐌 through BOSE speaker amp. terminal 24 and 37
쐌 to terminals 44 and 43 of the woofer.
SC
IDX
EL-195
AUDIO
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0167
MEL314O
EL-196
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — NHEL0081
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL315O
EL-197
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)
MEL316O
EL-198
AUDIO
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL317O
EL-199
AUDIO
MEL619Q
EL-200
AUDIO
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL620Q
EL-201
AUDIO
Trouble Diagnoses

AUDIO UNIT NHEL0220S01
Symptom Possible causes Repair order
Audio unit inoperative (no 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 1, located in fuse block (J/B)].
digital display and no 2. Poor audio unit case ground Turn ignition switch ON and verify that battery posi-
sound from speakers). 3. Audio unit tive voltage is present at terminal 10 of audio unit.
2. Check audio unit case ground.
3. Remove audio unit for repair.
Audio unit presets are lost 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse [No. 56, located in fuse and fusible
when ignition switch is 2. Audio unit link box] and verify that battery positive voltage is
turned OFF. present at terminal 6 of audio unit.
2. Remove audio unit for repair.
Audio unit controls are 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse [No. 56, located in fuse and fusible
operational, but no sound 2. Amp. ON/OFF signal circuit link box]. Verify battery positive voltage is present at
is heard from any speaker. 3. Speaker amp. ground terminal 27 of BOSE speaker amp.
2. Check harness continuity between audio unit terminal
12 and BOSE speaker amp. terminal 25.
3. Check harness continuity between BOSE speaker
amp. terminal 40 and ground.
Individual speaker is noisy 1. Each speaker 1. Check speaker.

or inoperative. 2. Output circuit to each speaker 2. Check the output circuits to each speaker
쐌 between audio unit and BOSE speaker amp.
쐌 between BOSE speaker amp. and each speaker.
Woofer does not operate. 1. Power supply to woofer 1. Check 15A fuse (No. 67, located in fuse and fusible
2. Amp. ON/OFF signal circuit link box).
3. Speaker amp. ground Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
4. Output circuit to woofer 48 of woofer.
2. Check harness continuity between audio unit terminal
12 and woofer terminal 45.
3. Check harness continuity between woofer terminal 47
and ground.
4. Check the output circuits to woofer from BOSE
speaker amp.
AM/FM stations are weak 1. Window antenna 1. Check window antenna.

or noisy. 2. Audio unit ground 2. Check audio unit ground condition.
3. Audio unit 3. Remove audio unit for repair.
Audio unit generates noise 1. Poor audio unit ground 1. Check audio unit ground.
in AM and FM modes with 2. Loose or missing ground bonding straps 2. Check ground bonding straps.
engine running. 3. Ignition condenser or rear window 3. Replace ignition condenser or rear window defogger
defogger noise suppressor condenser noise suppressor condenser.
4. Ignition coil or secondary wiring 4. Check ignition coil and secondary wiring.
5. Audio unit 5. Remove audio unit for repair.
Audio unit generates noise 1. Poor audio unit ground 1. Check audio unit ground.
in AM and FM modes with 2. Antenna 2. Check antenna.
accessories on (switch 3. Accessory ground 3. Check accessory ground.
pops and motor noise). 4. Faulty accessory 4. Replace accessory.
EL-202
AUDIO
Inspection
Inspection =NHEL0221
AUDIO UNIT AND AMP. NHEL0221S01
All voltage inspections are made with:
쐌 Ignition switch ON or ACC GI
쐌 Audio unit ON
쐌 Audio unit and amps. connected (If audio unit or amp. is removed for inspection, supply a ground to the
case using a jumper wire.)
MA
ANTENNA
Using a jumper wire, clip an auxiliary ground between antenna and body.
NHEL0221S02
EM
쐌 If reception improves, check antenna ground (at body surface).
쐌 If reception does not improve, check main feeder cable for short circuit or open circuit. LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-203
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — REMOTE —
Wiring Diagram — REMOTE — NHEL0306
MEL621Q
EL-204
AUDIO ANTENNA
Wiring Diagram — W/ANT —
Wiring Diagram — W/ANT — NHEL0085
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL320O
EL-205
AUDIO ANTENNA
Location of Antenna
Location of Antenna NHEL0087
MEL378K
Window Antenna Repair NHEL0250

ELEMENT CHECK NHEL0250S01
1. Attach probe circuit tester (in ohm range) to antenna terminal
on each side.
If an element is OK, continuity should exist.
If an element is broken, no continuity should exist. Go to step
2.
SEL250I
EL-206
AUDIO ANTENNA
Window Antenna Repair (Cont’d)
쐌 When measuring continuity, wrap tin foil around the top of
probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your fin-
ger.
GI
MA
EM
SEL122R
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL252I
RS
2. To locate broken point, move probe along element. Tester
needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the point.
BT
HA
SC
SEL253I
ELEMENT REPAIR NHEL0250S02

Refer to “Filament Repair”, “REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER” (EL-
192). IDX
EL-207
POWER SUNROOF
System Description

OUTLINE NHEL0222S01
Electric sunroof system consists of
쐌 Sunroof switch
쐌 Sunroof motor
쐌 Smart entrance control unit
Smart entrance control unit controls retained power operation.
The sunroof can be opened or closed and tilted up or down with the sunroof switch.
RETAINED POWER OPERATION NHEL0222S02
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 sec-
onds
쐌 to sunroof motor terminal 6
When power is supplied, the electrical sunroof can be operated.
The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened.
RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-211).
INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION NHEL0222S04
The CPU of sunroof motor monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position (full closed or other)
for sunroof by the signals from encoder and limit switch in sunroof motor.
When sunroof motor detects interruption during the following close operation,
쐌 automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the “ON” position
쐌 automatic close operation during retained power operation
sunroof switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate about 150 mm (5.91 in).
EL-208
POWER SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram — SROOF —
Wiring Diagram — SROOF — NHEL0089
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL622Q
IDX
SEL986XB
EL-209
POWER SUNROOF

“RETAINED PWR” NHEL0223S01
SEF289X

SKIA3098E

SEL398Y
6. Touch “RETAINED PWR”.
SEL401Y

are available.
SEL274W
EL-210
POWER SUNROOF

GI

MA

EM

LC
This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from smart entrance control unit to power
window system, power sunroof system. Those systems can be operated when turning on EC
“RETAINED PWR” on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is tuned OFF.
NOTE:
RETAINED PWR During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch “OFF” position. FE
“RETAINED PWR” should be turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen when
ignition switch is ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF for checking retained power
operation. CONSULT-II might be stuck if “RETAINED PWR” is turned “ON” or “OFF”
on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is OFF.
AT
Work Support NHEL0224S0103 AX

RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects RAP signal’s SU
RETAINED PWR SET power supply period between two steps.
쐌 MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (2 min.)
BR
ST
RS
Symptom Possible cause Repair order BT

Power sunroof cannot be operated 1. 10A fuse, 40A fusible link and 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)],
using any switch. E90 circuit breaker 40A fusible link (letter i, located in fuse and fusible
2. Grounds M9, M25 and M87 link box) and E90 circuit breaker. Turn ignition switch HA
3. Sunroof switch “ON” and verify battery positive voltage is present at
4. Sunroof switch circuit terminals 1 and 6 of sunroof motor.
5. Sunroof motor 2. Check grounds M9, M25, M87. SC
3. Check sunroof switch.
4. Check harness between sunroof switch and sunroof
motor.
5. Replace sunroof motor.
Power sunroof cannot be operated 1. Sunroof switch 1. Check sunroof switch.

using one of the sunroof switches. 2. Sunroof switch circuit 2. Check the harness between sunroof motor and sun- IDX
roof switch.
EL-211
POWER SUNROOF
Power sunroof cannot be operated 1. Full closed position not initial- 1. Initialize full closed position.
or closed fully. ized 2. Check the following.
2. Sunroof slide mechanism a. Check obstacles in sunroof, etc.
3. Sunroof switch b. Check worn or deformed sunroof.
4. Sunroof switch circuit c. Check sunroof sash tilted too far inward or outward.
5. Sunroof motor 3. Check sunroof switch.
4. Check harness between sunroof motor and sunroof
switch.
5. Replace sunroof motor.
Retained power operation does not 1. RAP signal circuit 1. Check RAP signal.
operate properly. 2. Driver or passenger side door a. (With CONSULT-II)
switch circuit Check RAP signal with CONSULT-II. Use “ACTIVE
3. Smart entrance control unit TEST” mode, “RETAINED PWR” in “SMART
ENTRANCE”. (Refer to EL-210.)
If NG, go to the step b. below.
b. Verify 12 positive voltage from smart entrance control
unit is present at terminal 6 of sunroof motor:
쐌 Within 45 seconds after ignition switch turns off.
쐌 When front door LH and RH is closed.
and driver or passenger side door switch.
Check driver or passenger side door switch.
EL-212
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — NHEL0090
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL623Q
EL-213
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR —
Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR — NHEL0271
MEL624Q
EL-214
TRUNK LID AND FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
Wiring Diagram — T&FLID —
Wiring Diagram — T&FLID — NHEL0168
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL625Q
IDX
SEL987XA
EL-215
TELEPHONE (PRE WIRE)
Wiring Diagram — PHONE —
Wiring Diagram — PHONE — NHEL0170
MEL295K
EL-216
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER

Location NHEL0272
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
SEL383YA BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-217
System Description
System Description =NHEL0273

OPERATIVE CONDITION NHEL0273S01
The drive position can be set in 2 ways, manually and automatically.
Manual Operation NHEL0273S0101
The driver’s seat can be adjusted for sliding, reclining, front cushion height and rear cushion height with the
LH power seat switches. The manual operation can be adjusted with the IGN key in any position.
Automatic Operation NHEL0273S0102
The driver’s seat is adjusted to the proper positions for the driver automatically, in 3 different ways: MEMORY
AUTOMATIC SET, AUTOMATIC EXITING SETTING and AUTOMATIC SET RETURN. (Automatic Drive Posi-
tioner = ADP)
CONDITIONS INHIBITING AUTOMATIC OPERATION NHEL0273S02
Automatic memory setting procedures are suspended under any of the following conditions:
1) When vehicle speed is more than 7 km/h (4 MPH).
2) When driver’s side power seat switch is turned on.
3) When any two of the switches (set switch and memory switches 1 and 2) are turned ON.
4) When memory seat cancel switch is turned on.
5) When selector lever is in any position other than “P”.
6) When ignition switch is turned to “START” position.
(Operation resumes when ignition switch is returned to “ON”.)
7) When detention switch malfunction is detected:
쐌 Detention switch failure is sensed when detention switch remains off for at least 2 seconds at a vehicle
speed of greater than 7 km/h (4 MPH).
FAIL-SAFE SYSTEM NHEL0273S03
Output Failure NHEL0273S0301
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, if any of the parts (indicated in the following chart) move more
than the specified amount within a period “T2” when no “ON” input is sent from any of the switches (indicated
in the following chart), or an output from the automatic drive positioner is not produced, an output failure is
sensed. Motor operation will be suspended automatically, and all automatic operations will be ineffective. (In
this case, the motor will not operate manually.)
OPERATED PORTION T2 Allowable measurement
Seat sliding Approx. 2.5 sec. Within 6 mm (0.24 in)
Seat reclining Same as above Change angle within 1°
Absolving NHEL0273S0302
When moving selector lever back to “P” position after having moved it to any position except “P”, fail-safe
operation will be canceled.
INITIALIZATION NHEL0273S04
After reconnecting battery cable, perform initialization procedure A or B. If initialization has not been performed,
automatic drive positioner will not operate.
PROCEDURE A
1) Insert key in the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is in “OFF” position.)
2) Open , close , open driver side door. (Do not perform with the door switch operation.)
3) End
PROCEDURE B
1) Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
2) End
EL-218
MEMORY AUTOMATIC SET =NHEL0273S05
Two drive positions can be retained in the memory. Press memory switch to set driver’s seat to preset posi-
tion.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL592W
NOTE: ST
쐌 When memory switch for which driver’s seat positions are already retained in memory is pressed, new seat
positions will be retained in memory in place of the previously set positions.
쐌 Drive position is erased from the memory when battery cable is disconnected more than 30 seconds. After RS
connecting battery cable, perform initialization procedures.
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL593W
EL-219
NOTE:
1) Do not keep memory seat cancel switch pressed as it will not operate.
2) Automatic exiting setting will be performed.
3) The driver’s seat position (see the following Table) operates in the order of priority.
The order of priority Operated portion
1 Seat sliding
2 Seat reclining
3 Seat front lifting
4 Seat rear lifting
AUTOMATIC EXITING SETTING NHEL0273S06

“Exiting” positions:
Driver’s seat ... Slides about 40 mm (1.57 in) rear from normal sitting position.
SEL594W
AUTOMATIC SET RETURN NHEL0273S07

With driver’s seat set to the “exiting” position, operating one of the following procedures moves it to the posi-
tion previously retained in memory.
SEL595W
EL-220
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0274
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL626Q
EL-221
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP —
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — NHEL0275
MEL327O
EL-222
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL627Q
EL-223
MEL628Q
EL-224
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL629Q
EL-225
MEL651K
EL-226
On Board Diagnosis
On Board Diagnosis NHEL0276
GI
MA
EM
SEL263V LC
HOW TO PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS NHEL0276S01
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL596W
*1: If no malfunction is indicated, self-diagnosis will end after the vehicle speed sensor diagnosis is performed.
*2: Diagnosis ends after self-diagnostic results have been indicated for 10 minutes if left unattended.
EL-227
On Board Diagnosis (Cont’d)
MALFUNCTION CODE TABLE =NHEL0276S02
In this mode, a malfunction code is indicated by the number of flashes from the automatic drive positioner
indicator lamps (indicator lamp 1, indicator lamp 2) as shown below.
SEL597W
Refer- Refer-
Code Detected Code Detected
Diagnostic procedure ence Diagnostic procedure ence
No. items No. items
page page
PROCEDURE 2 PROCEDURE 5
Seat
Seat (Sliding encoder check) EL-234 [Lifting encoder (rear) check] EL-240
1 4 lifting
sliding PROCEDURE 6 EL-242 PROCEDURE 9 EL-245
rear
(Sliding motor check) [Lifting motor (rear) check]
PROCEDURE 3
Vehicle
Seat (Reclining encoder check) EL-236 PROCEDURE 12
2 9 speed EL-247
reclining PROCEDURE 7 EL-243 (Vehicle speed sensor check)
sensor
(Reclining motor check)
PROCEDURE 4
Seat
[Lifting encoder (front) check] EL-238
3 lifting
PROCEDURE 8 EL-244
front
[Lifting motor (front) check]
EL-228
Trouble Diagnoses

WORK FLOW NHEL0277S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL599W
*1 EL-227 *2 EL-228
IDX
EL-229
SEL600W
*1: After reconnecting battery cable, perform initialization proce-

dure A or B.
If initialization has not been performed, automatic drive positioner
will not operate.
PROCEDURE A
1) Insert key in the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is in
“OFF” position.)
2) Open , close , open driver side door. (Do not perform with
the door switch operation.)
3) End
PROCEDURE B
1) Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
EL-230
2) End
After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart
below.
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform preliminary GI

check, EL-230. Symptom numbers in the symptom chart cor-
respond with those of preliminary check.
MA
PROCEDURE Diagnostic procedure EM

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 233 234 236 238 240 242 243
LC
(Power supply and ground circuit

[Lifting encoder (front) check]
[Lifting encoder (rear) check]

for Driver’s seat control unit)
(Reclining encoder check)

EC

(Sliding encoder check)
(Sliding motor check)

SYMPTOM
FE
AT
1 No seat system functions operate. X AX

Sliding X
Some of the seat
system functions Reclining X
SU
2 do not operate
during automatic/ Lifting (Front)
manual operation. BR
Lifting (Rear)
No functions operate during auto-

matic operation, and some/all func- ST
3
tions do not during manual opera-
tion.
RS
Sliding X
Some of the seat
system functions Reclining X
4 do not operate BT
during automatic Lifting (Front) X
operation.
Lifting (Rear) X
HA
No automatic operation functions
5
operate.
Drive position cannot be retained in

SC
6
the memory.
Sliding
Does not operate
during manual Reclining
7 operation. (Oper-
ates during auto- Lifting (Front) IDX
matic operation.)
Lifting (Rear)
Automatic operation cannot be can-

8
celed.
9 Memory indicator does not light up.
X : Applicable
EL-231
PROCEDURE Diagnostic procedure
REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 244 245 246 246 247 249 250
and vehicle speed sensor check)

(Key, park position, door switch

(Seat memory switch check)

[Lifting motor (rear) check]
(Power seat switch check)
(Memory indicator check)

(Cencel switch check)
SYMPTOM
1 No seat system functions operate.
Sliding
Some of the seat
system functions Reclining
2 do not operate
during automatic/ Lifting (Front) X
manual operation.
Lifting (Rear) X
No functions operate during auto- X

matic operation, and some/all func- (ACC, ON
3 X
tions do not during manual opera- START
tion. signal)
Sliding
Some of the seat
system functions Reclining
4 do not operate
during automatic Lifting (Front)
operation.
Lifting (Rear)
No automatic operation functions

5 X X
operate.
X
Drive position cannot be retained in
6 (IGN ON X
the memory.
signal)
Sliding X
Does not operate
during manual Reclining X
7 operation. (Oper-
ates during auto- Lifting (Front) X
matic operation.)
Lifting (Rear) X
Automatic operation cannot be can-

8 X
celed.
9 Memory indicator does not light up. X
X : Applicable
EL-232
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 =NHEL0277S04
(Power supply and ground circuit for driver’s seat control unit)
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 1 and ground. GI
(Refer to wiring diagram in EL-222.)
Ignition switch position MA
Terminals
OFF ACC ON START
1 - Ground Battery voltage EM

SEL601W
쐌 Circuit breaker LC
쐌 Harness for open or short between circuit breaker and seat
control unit LH
EC
FE
AT

NHEL0277S0402
Check continuity between seat control unit LH terminal 33 and
ground.
(Refer to wiring diagram in EL-222.) SU
BR
33 - Ground Yes
ST
SEL602W
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-233
(Sliding encoder check)
1 CHECK SLIDING ENCODER OUTPUT SIGNAL
Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 18 and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope when power seat
slide is operated.
SEL603W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Sliding encoder is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
2 CHECK SLIDING ENCODER INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground.
SEL604W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
NG 䊳 Replace seat control unit LH.
EL-234
3 CHECK SLIDING ENCODER OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and sliding device LH connector.
2. Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and sliding device LH connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL605W
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
NG 䊳 Repair harness. FE
4 CHECK SLIDING ENCODER SHORT CIRCUIT AT

Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL606W
OK or NG RS
OK 䊳 Replace sliding encoder.
NG 䊳 Repair harness. BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-235
(Reclining encoder check)
1 CHECK RECLINING ENCODER OUTPUT SIGNAL
reclining is operated.
SEL607W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Reclining encoder is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
2 CHECK RECLINING ENCODER INPUT SIGNAL

SEL608W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
EL-236
3 CHECK RECLINING ENCODER OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and reclining device LH connector.
2. Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and reclining LH connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL609W
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
4 CHECK RECLINING ENCODER SHORT CIRCUIT AT

AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL610W
OK or NG RS
OK 䊳 Replace reclining encoder.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-237
[Lifting encoder (front) check]
1 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (FRONT) OUTPUT SIGNAL
lifting (front) is operated.
SEL611W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Lifting encoder (front) is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
2 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL

SEL612W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
EL-238
3 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (FRONT) OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and front lifting device LH connector.
2. Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and front lifting device LH connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL613W
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
4 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (FRONT) SHORT CIRCUIT AT

AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL614W
OK or NG RS
OK 䊳 Replace lifting encoder (front).
HA
SC
IDX
EL-239
[Lifting encoder (rear) check]
1 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (REAR) OUTPUT SIGNAL
lifting (rear) is operated.
SEL615W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Lifting encoder (rear) is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
2 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL

SEL616W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
EL-240
3 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (REAR) OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and rear lifting device LH connector.
2. Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and rear lifting device LH connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL617W
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
4 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (REAR) SHORT CIRCUIT AT

AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL618W
OK or NG RS
OK 䊳 Replace lifting encoder (rear).
HA
SC
IDX
EL-241
(Sliding motor check)
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO SLIDING MOTOR
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 3 or 10 and ground.
SEL619W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
2 CHECK SLIDING MOTOR

1. Disconnect sliding device LH connector.
2. Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation.
SEL620W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and sliding motor.
NG 䊳 Replace sliding motor.
EL-242
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO RECLINING MOTOR
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 4 or 12 and ground. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL621W
EC
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2. FE
AT
2 CHECK RECLINING MOTOR
1. Disconnect reclining device LH connector. AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL622W
OK or NG
BT
OK 䊳 Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and reclining motor.
NG 䊳 Replace reclining motor.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-243
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 5 or 13 and ground.
SEL623W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
2 CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)

1. Disconnect front lifting device LH connector.
SEL624W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and lifting motor (front).
NG 䊳 Replace lifting motor (front).
EL-244
[Lifting motor (rear) check]
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 6 or 7 and ground. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL625W
EC
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2. FE
AT
2 CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)
1. Disconnect rear lifting device LH connector. AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL626W
OK or NG
BT
OK 䊳 Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and lifting motor (rear).
NG 䊳 Replace lifting motor (rear).
HA
SC
IDX
EL-245
(Power seat switch check)
1 CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH
1. Disconnect power seat switch LH connector.
2. Check continuity between power seat switch terminals (B515).
SEL016Y
OK or NG
쐌 Ground circuit for power seat switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and power seat switch
NG 䊳 Replace power seat switch.

(Cancel switch check)
1 CHECK CANCEL SWITCH
1. Disconnect memory seat cancel switch connector.
2. Check continuity between memory seat cancel switch terminals.
SEL628WD
OK or NG
쐌 Ground circuit for cancel switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and memory seat cancel
switch
NG 䊳 Replace memory seat cancel switch.
EL-246
(Key, detention, door switch and vehicle speed sensor check)
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 2 and ground. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL629W
EC
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2. FE
쐌 10A fuse [No. 13, located in fuse block (J/B)] AT
쐌 Key switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and key switch
AX
2 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (ON AND START)

SU
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals and ground.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL630W
OK or NG
HA
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
쐌 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)] SC
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and fuse
IDX
EL-247
3 CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

SEL631W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
쐌 Park position switch
쐌 Park position switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and park position switch
4 CHECK DRIVER DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

SEL632W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 5.
쐌 Driver door switch
쐌 Driver door switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and driver door switch
5 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

Does speedometer operate normally?
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 6.
NG 䊳 Check speedometer and vehicle speed sensor circuit. Refer to EL-134.
EL-248
6 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PULL UP VOLTAGE

2. Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 32 and ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL633W
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and combination meter.
(Memory seat switch check)
NHEL0277S16
AT
1 CHECK MEMORY SEAT SWITCH
1. Disconnect memory seat switch connector.
AX
2. Check continuity between memory seat switch terminals.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL634WD
OK or NG BT
쐌 Ground circuit for memory seat switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and memory seat switch HA
NG 䊳 Replace memory seat switch.
SC
IDX
EL-249
(Memory indicator check)
1 CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
Check indicator lamp illumination.
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
NG 䊳 Replace memory seat switch (indicator lamp).
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR INDICATOR LAMP

1. Disconnect memory seat switch connector.
2. Check voltage between memory seat switch terminal 5 and ground.
SEL635WD
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and memory seat switch
쐌 10A fuse [No. 12 located in the fuse block (J/B)]
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuse and indicator lamp
EL-250
POWER SEAT
Wiring Diagram — SEAT —
Wiring Diagram — SEAT — NHEL0092
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL330O
EL-251
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT —
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT — NHEL0093
MEL630Q
EL-252
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL631Q
EL-253
HEATED SEAT
Seatback Heating Unit
Seatback Heating Unit NHEL0294
SBT314
EL-254
REAR SUNSHADE

Location NHEL0278
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
SEL636W BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-255
REAR SUNSHADE
System Description

When ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, power is supplied.
쐌 to rear sunshade unit terminal 5.
Ground is supplied at all times
쐌 to rear sunshade unit terminal 6
쐌 through body ground M9, M25 and M87.
OPEN OPERATION NHEL0279S01
When rear sunshade switch is turned to “UP”, the ground is supplied to rear sunshade unit terminal 1. Based
on the ground signal to control unit terminal 6 through rear sunshade unit terminal 1,
power is supplied
쐌 to motor terminal 2
쐌 from control unit terminal 9
and ground is supplied
쐌 from control unit terminal 8.
When sunshade is fully up, control unit stops to supply power to motor based on the signal from UP/DOWN
limit switch.
CLOSE OPERATION NHEL0279S02
When rear sunshade switch is turned to “DOWN”, ground is supplied to rear sunshade unit terminal 2. Based
on the ground signal to control unit terminal 7 through rear sunshade unit terminal 2,
power is supplied
쐌 from control unit terminal 8
and ground is supplied
쐌 from control unit terminal 9.
When sunshade is fully down, control unit stops to supply power to motor based on the signal from UP/DOWN
limit switch.
Once the rear sunshade switch is pushed, the open or close operation will be continued until the control unit
detects full open or full close based on the signal from UP/DOWN limit switch. During open or close opera-
tion of sunshade, the input signal from rear sunshade switch is ignored.
When control unit detects the slack of sunshade based on the signal from slack detection switch, the motor
will be stopped. When control unit detects no slack of sunshade based on the signal from slack detection
switch, power is supplied again to motor after 1 sec. after no slack is detected.
EL-256
REAR SUNSHADE
Wiring Diagram — SHADE —
Wiring Diagram — SHADE — NHEL0280
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL385O
EL-257
REAR SUNSHADE
Wiring Diagram — SHADE — (Cont’d)
MEL386O
EL-258
REAR SUNSHADE
Trouble Diagnoses

POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0281S01
Check voltage between rear sunshade unit terminal 5 and ground.
Ignition switch position
GI
Terminals
OFF ACC ON
MA
5 - Ground 0V Battery voltage
If NG, check the following. EM

SEL926VA
쐌 Harness for open or short between 10A fuse [No. 23, located
in fuse block (J/B)] and rear sunshade unit. LC
EC
FE
AT
GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK AX

NHEL0281S02
Check continuity between rear sunshade unit terminal 6 and
ground.
SU
6 - Ground Yes BR
If NG, check harness for open between rear sunshade unit termi-
nal 6 and body ground M9, M25 and M87. ST
SEL937W
RS
REAR SUNSHADE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0281S03
1. Disconnect rear sunshade unit connector.
2. Check the following continuity. BT
Terminals Switch position Continuity
Up Yes HA
1 - Ground Neutral No
Down No
SC
Up No
SEL924VA
2 - Ground Neutral No
Down Yes
IDX
쐌 Harness for open or short between rear sunshade unit and rear
sunshade switch
쐌 Harness for open or short between rear sunshade switch and
ground
쐌 Rear sunshade switch
EL-259
REAR SUNSHADE
REAR SUNSHADE SWITCH CHECK NHEL0281S04
1. Disconnect rear sunshade switch.
2. Check continuity between rear sunshade switch terminals.
Terminals Switch position Continuity
Up Yes
1-3 Neutral No
Down No
Up No
SEL050X
2-3 Neutral No
Down Yes
If NG, replace rear sunshade switch.
EL-260
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
System Description

Refer to EC-54, “Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) System” in “ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC
DESCRIPTION CONTROL SYSTEM”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-261
POWER WINDOW
System Description

쐌 from 40A fusible link (letter I, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 to circuit breaker terminal 1
쐌 through circuit breaker terminal 2
쐌 to power window relay terminal 3,
쐌 to front power window main switch terminal 4, and
쐌 from 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
쐌 to rear power window switch LH and RH terminal 7
Ground is supplied to power window relay terminal 1
Ground is supplied to rear power window switch LH terminal 8
쐌 through body grounds B7 (with TCS) or B78 (with VDC) and B46 (with rear sunshade), or B12 (without
rear sunshade).
Ground is supplied to rear power window switch RH terminal 8
쐌 through body grounds B106 and B127.
The power window relay is energized and power is supplied
쐌 through power window relay terminal 5
쐌 to front power window main switch terminal 11,
쐌 to front power window switch RH terminal 13,
쐌 to rear power window switch LH and RH terminals 5.
MANUAL OPERATION NHEL0191S01
Front Door LH NHEL0191S0101
Ground is supplied
쐌 to front power window main switch terminal 5
WINDOW UP
When the front LH switch in the front power window main switch is pressed in the up position, power is sup-
plied
쐌 to front power window regulator LH terminal 1
쐌 through front power window main switch terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
WINDOW DOWN
When the front LH switch in the front power window main switch is pressed in the down position, power is
supplied
Ground is supplied
Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released.
Front Door RH NHEL0191S0102
Ground is supplied
EL-262
POWER WINDOW
WINDOW UP
When the front RH switch in the front power window switch RH is pressed in the UP position, power is sup- GI
plied
쐌 to front power window regulator RH terminal 1
쐌 through front power window switch RH terminal 5. MA
Ground is supplied
EM
쐌 through front power window switch RH terminal 4.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
WINDOW DOWN LC
When the front RH switch in the front power window switch RH is pressed in the DOWN position, power is
supplied
쐌 to front power window regulator RH terminal 3 EC
Ground is supplied FE
Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released. AT
Rear Door NHEL0191S0105
REAR DOOR AX
MAIN SWITCH OPERATION
Rear Door LH
Power is supplied SU
쐌 through front power window main switch terminal (13, 12)
쐌 to rear power window switch LH terminal (3, 4) BR
The subsequent operation is the same as front power window switch RH operation.
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH OPERATION
Power is supplied ST
쐌 through rear power window switch LH terminal (1, 2)
쐌 to rear power window regulator LH terminal (1, 2)
RS
Ground is supplied
쐌 to rear power window regulator LH terminal (2, 1)
쐌 through rear power window switch LH terminal (2, 1) BT
쐌 to rear power window switch LH terminal (4, 3)
HA
Then, the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released.
Rear Door RH
Power is supplied SC
쐌 to rear power window switch RH terminal (3, 4)
The subsequent operation is the same as front power window switch RH operation.
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH OPERATION
Power is supplied IDX
쐌 through rear power window switch RH terminal (1, 2)
쐌 to rear power window regulator RH terminal (1, 2)
Ground is supplied
쐌 to rear power window regulator RH terminal (2, 1)
쐌 through rear power window switch RH terminal (2, 1)
쐌 to rear power window switch RH terminal (4, 3)
Then, the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released.
EL-263
POWER WINDOW
Power Window Opened/Closed Operation NHEL0191S0106
쐌 When ignition key switch is OFF, front power window can be opened or closed by turning the front door
key cylinder to UNLOCK/LOCK direction.
쐌 Power window can be opened as the door key cylinder is kept fully turning to the UNLOCK direction.
쐌 Power window can be closed as the door key cylinder is kept fully turning to the LOCK direction.
The power window opening stops when the following operations are carried out:
쐌 While performing open/close the window, power window is stopped at the position as the door key cylin-
der is placed on Neutral.
쐌 When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening is operated.
AUTO OPERATION NHEL0191S02
The power window AUTO feature enables the driver to open or close the driver’s and passenger’s window
without holding the window switch in the down or up position.
The AUTO feature operates on the driver’s and passenger’s side window.
POWER WINDOW LOCK NHEL0191S03
The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for driver’s door window.
When the lock switch is pressed to lock position, ground of the front and rear power window switches in the
front power window main switch is disconnected. This prevents the power window motors from operating.
RETAINED POWER OPERATION NHEL0191S04
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 sec-
onds
쐌 to power window relay terminal 2
Ground is always supplied
쐌 to power window relay terminal 1
When power and ground are supplied, the power window relay continues to be energized, and the power win-
dow can be operated.
RAP signal’s period can be changed by CONSULT-II. (Refer to EL-273.)
INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION NHEL0191S05
Front power window main switch monitors the power window regulator motor operation and the power win-
dow position (full closed or other) for driver’s and passenger’s side power window by the signals from encoder
and limit switch in front power window regulator (driver’s and passenger’s side).
When front power window main switch detects interruption during the following close operation in the driver’s
side door,
쐌 automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the “ON” position
쐌 automatic close operation during retained power operation
쐌 manual close operation during retained power operation
Front power window main switch controls driver’s and passenger’s side power window regulator motor for open
and the power window will be lowered about 150 mm (5.91 in).
EL-264
POWER WINDOW
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0103
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL338O
EL-265
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — NHEL0104
MEL632Q
EL-266
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL340O
EL-267
POWER WINDOW
MEL633Q
EL-268
POWER WINDOW
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL342O
EL-269
POWER WINDOW
MEL634Q
EL-270
POWER WINDOW
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
MEL344O
SC
IDX
SEL480YA
EL-271
POWER WINDOW

SEF289X

SKIA3098E

SEL398Y
6. Touch “RETAINED PWR”.
SEL401Y

are available.
SEL400Y
EL-272
POWER WINDOW

GI

MA

EM

LC
RETAINED PWR This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from smart entrance control unit to power window
system and power sunroof system. Those systems can be operated when turning on EC
“RETAINED PWR” on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is tuned OFF.
NOTE:
During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch in “OFF” position. FE
“RETAINED PWR” should be turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen when ignition
switch is ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF to check retained power operation. CON-
SULT-II might be stuck if “RETAINED PWR” is turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II
screen when ignition switch is OFF.
AT
Work Support NHEL0236S0103 AX

RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects RAP signal’s SU
RETAINED PWR SET power supply period between two steps.
쐌 MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (2 min.)
BR
ST
RS
Symptom Possible cause Repair order BT

None of the power windows can be 1. 10A fuse, 40A fusible link 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block
operated using any switch. 2. E90 circuit breaker (J/B)], 40A fusible link (letter I, located in fuse and
3. Power window relay fusible link box). HA
4. E90 circuit breaker circuit 2. Check E90 circuit breaker.
5. Power window relay circuit 3. Check power window relay.
6. Ground circuit 4. Check the following. SC
7. Front power window main switch a. Check harness between E90 circuit breaker and
40A fusible link (letter I, located in fuse and fusible
link box).
b. Check harness between E90 circuit breaker and
front power window main switch.
a. Check harness between E90 circuit breaker and
IDX
power window relay.
b. Check harness between fuse and power window
relay.
a. Check ground circuit of front power window main
switch terminal 5.
b. Check power window relay ground circuit.
7. Check front power window main switch.
EL-273
POWER WINDOW
Driver side power window cannot 1. Driver side power window regu- 1. Check harness between front power window main
be operated but other windows can lator circuit switch and driver side power window regulator for
be operated. 2. Driver side power window regu- open or short circuit.
lator 2. Check driver side power window regulator.
3. Front power window main switch 3. Check front power window main switch.
One or more power windows 1. Power window switches 1. Check power window switch.
except driver’s side window cannot 2. Power window regulators 2. Check power window regulator.
be operated. 3. Power window main switch 3. Check power window main switch.
4. Power window circuit 4. Check the following.
a. Check harness between the rear power window
switch (LH and RH) terminal 5 and power window
relay terminal 5.
b. Check harnesses between power window main
switch and power window switch for open/short cir-
cuit.
c. Check harnesses between power window switch
and power window regulator for open/short circuit.
Power windows except driver’s side 1. Power window main switch 1. Check front power window main switch.
window cannot be operated using
power window main switch but can
be operated by power window
switch.
Driver side power window auto- 1. Front power window main switch 1. Check front power window main switch.
matic operation does not function 2. Encoder and limit switch 2. Check encoder and limit switch. (EL-275)
properly.
Retained power operation does not 1. RAP signal circuit 1. Check RAP signal.
operate properly. 2. Driver or passenger side door a. (With CONSULT-II)
switch circuit 쐌 Check RAP signal with CONSULT-II.
3. Smart entrance control unit Use “WORK SUPPORT” mode, “RETAINED PWR”
in “SMART ENTRANCE”. (Refer to EL-272.)
쐌 Check RAP signal with CONSULT-II.
Use “ACTIVE TEST” mode, “RETAINED PWR” in
“SMART ENTRANCE”.
(Refer to EL-272.)
If NG, go to the step b. below.
b. Verify 12 positive voltage from smart entrance con-
trol unit is present at terminal 2 of power window
relay:
쐌 Within 45 seconds after ignition switch turns off.*1
쐌 When front door LH and RH is closed.
and driver or passenger side door switch for short
circuit.
Check driver or passenger side door switch ground
circuit.
Check driver or passenger side door switch.
Interruption detection function does 1. Encoder and limit switch 1. Check encoder and limit switch. (EL-275)
not operate properly.
NOTE: *1 RAP signal’s period can be changed by CONSULT-II. (EL-273)
EL-274
POWER WINDOW
ENCODER AND LIMIT SWITCH CHECK =NHEL0105S01
1 CHECK DOOR WINDOW SLIDE MECHANISM

Check the following.
쐌 Obstacles in window, glass molding, etc. GI
쐌 Worn or deformed glass molding
쐌 Door sash tilted too far inward or outward
쐌 Door window regulator MA
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2. EM
NG 䊳 Remove obstacles or repair door window slide mechanism.
LC
2 CHECK LIMIT SWITCH POWER SUPPLY INPUT SIGNAL
1. Disconnect front power window regulator LH or RH connector. EC
3. Check voltage between front power window regulator LH harness connector D4 terminal 2 (G/W) or front power window
regulator RH harness connector D38 terminal 2 (G/W) and ground. FE
AT
AX
SU
SEL835Y
BR
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
ST
NG 䊳 GO TO 3.
RS
3 CHECK LIMIT SWITCH POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between front power window main switch terminal 15 or front power window switch RH terminal 16 and
ground. BT
HA
SC
SEL725WB IDX
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Repair harness or connectors between power window switch and front power window
regulator.
NG 䊳 Replace power window main switch or front power window switch RH.
EL-275
POWER WINDOW
4 CHECK LIMIT SWITCH OPERATION

1. Connect front power window regulator LH or RH connector.
2. Check voltage between front power window main switch terminal 15 or front power window switch RH terminal 16 and
ground during power window closing operation.
SEL726W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 7.
NG 䊳 GO TO 5.
5 RESET LIMIT SWITCH

Reset limit switch. Refer to BT-22, “Front Door Glass Limit Switch Reset”. Then check voltage between front power win-
dow main switch terminal 15 or front power window switch RH terminal 16 and ground during power window closing
operation at least ten times.
SEL726W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 INSPECTION END
NG 䊳 GO TO 6.
EL-276
POWER WINDOW
6 CHECK POWER WINDOW REGULATOR GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect front power window main switch connector or front power window switch RH connector.
쐌 Continuity between front power window main switch harness connector D13 terminal 17 (W/B) and front power window GI
regulator LH harness connector D4 terminal 6 (W/B).
쐌 Continuity between front power window switch RH harness connector D33 terminal 20 (W/B) and front power window
regulator RH harness connector D38 terminal 6 (W/B). MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL843Y FE
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Replace front power window regulator LH or RH. AT
NG 䊳 Repair harness or connectors between power window switch and front power window
regulator.
AX
7 CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect front power window main switch or front power window switch RH connector. SU
3. Check voltage between front power window main switch harness connector D10 terminal 7 (G/R) or front power win-
dow switch RH harness connector D33 terminal 15 (G/R) and ground. BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL844Y
HA
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 8. SC
NG 䊳 Replace front power window main switch or front power window switch RH.
IDX
EL-277
POWER WINDOW
8 CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between front power window regulator LH harness connector D4 terminal 4 (G/R) or front power window
regulator RH harness connector D38 terminal 4 (G/R) and ground.
SEL838Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 9.
9 CHECK ENCODER INPUT SIGNAL

1. Connect front power window regulator LH or RH connector.
2. Check voltage signal between front power window main switch harness connector D10 terminal 14 (G/Y) or front power
window switch RH harness connector D33 terminal 19 (G/Y) and ground with oscilloscope when power window is in
automatic closing operation.
SEL727W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Replace front power window main switch or front power window switch RH.
NG 䊳 GO TO 10.
EL-278
POWER WINDOW
10 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect front power window main switch connector or front power window switch RH and front power window regu-
lator LH or RH connector. GI
쐌 Check continuity between front power window main switch harness connector D10 terminal 14 (G/Y) and front power
window regulator LH harness connector D4 terminal 5 (G/Y). MA
쐌 Check continuity between front power window switch RH harness connector D33 terminal 19 (G/Y) and front power win-
dow regulator RH harness connector D38 terminal 5 (G/Y).
쐌 Check continuity between front power window main switch harness connector D10 terminal 14 (G/Y) or front power win- EM
dow switch RH harness connector D33 terminal 19 (G/Y) and ground.
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL894Y
OK or NG
AX
OK 䊳 Replace front power window regulator LH or RH.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-279
POWER DOOR LOCK

Location NHEL0106
SEL053YA

쐌 The lock/unlock switches (LH and RH) on door trim can lock and unlock all doors.
쐌 With the door key inserted in the key cylinder on front LH, turning it to “LOCK”, will lock all doors; turning
it to “UNLOCK” once unlocks the corresponding door; turning it to “UNLOCK” again within 5 seconds after
the first unlock operation unlocks all of the other doors. (Signals from door key cylinder switch)
Select unlock mode can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-287).
쐌 If the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder and one or more of the doors are open, setting the lock/
unlock switch to “LOCK” locks the doors once but then immediately unlocks them. Key reminder door mode
can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-287).
EL-280
POWER DOOR LOCK
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0108
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL345O
EL-281
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — NHEL0109

FIG. 1 NHEL0109S01
MEL635Q
EL-282
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NHEL0109S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL347O
EL-283
POWER DOOR LOCK
FIG. 3 NHEL0109S03
MEL348O
EL-284
POWER DOOR LOCK
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL579Y
EL-285
POWER DOOR LOCK

“DOOR LOCK” NHEL0238S01
SEF289X

SKIA3098E

SEL398Y
6. Touch “DOOR LOCK”.
SEL023X

are available.
SEL274W
EL-286
POWER DOOR LOCK

“DOOR LOCK” NHEL0239S01
GI

MA
LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch (Rear).

EM
UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
KEY CYL LK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder. LC
KEY CYL UN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder.
LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from remote controller. EC

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. FE

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. AT

AX
This test is able to check all door lock actuators lock operation. These actuators lock when
ALL D/LK MTR
SU
This test is able to check front door lock actuator LH unlock operation. The actuator unlocks
DR D/UN MTR
when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. BR
This test is able to check door lock actuators (except front door lock actuator LH) unlock
NON DR D/UN
operation. These actuators unlock when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
ST

RS
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET Select unlock mode can be changed in this mode. Selects ON-OFF of select unlock mode.
BT
Key reminder door mode can be changed in this mode. Selects ON-OFF of key reminder door
ANTI-LOCK OUT SET
mode.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-287
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 289 290 291 292 293 295
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK

DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK

KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK
SYMPTOM
DOOR SWITCH CHECK
Key reminder door system does not operate prop-

X X X X
erly.
Specific door lock actuator does not operate. X X
Power door lock does not operate with door lock

X X
and unlock switch (LH and RH) on door trim.
Power door lock does not operate with front door

X X
key cylinder operation.
EL-288
POWER DOOR LOCK
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
=NHEL0193S02
Main Power Supply Circuit Check NHEL0193S0201
Terminals Ignition switch

GI
(+) (–) OFF ACC ON
49
Ground
Battery volt- Battery volt- Battery volt- MA
51 age age age
EM
SEL007Y
Ground Circuit Check NHEL0193S0202 LC

Connector Terminals Continuity
M144 43 - Ground Yes EC

M145 64 - Ground Yes
FE
AT
SEL008Y
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-289
POWER DOOR LOCK
DOOR SWITCH CHECK =NHEL0193S03
1 CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-DR”, “DOOR SW-AS”, “DOOR SW-RR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEL009Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminals 1 (LG), 2 (R/L) or 3 (R/W) and
ground.
SEL010YB
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-282.
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Door switch is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
2 CHECK DOOR SWITCHES

1. Disconnect door switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door switch connector terminals.
SEL900Y
OK or NG
쐌 Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch
NG 䊳 Replace door switch.
EL-290
POWER DOOR LOCK
KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK =NHEL0193S04

With CONSULT-II
Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL315W EC
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 25 (B/R) and ground. FE
AT
AX
SU
SEL011Y
BR
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Key switch is OK. ST
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
RS
Check continuity between key switch harness connector E154 terminals 3 and 4. BT
HA
SC
SEL549YA IDX
OK or NG
EL-291
POWER DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK =NHEL0193S05

With CONSULT-II
SEL341W
Without CONSULT-II
SEL396Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
EL-292
POWER DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK =NHEL0193S06

With CONSULT-II
Check front door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT- GI
II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL342W
scope when key inserted in front key cylinder is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after key is turned “LOCK” AT
or “UNLOCK”.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL397Y
OK or NG RS
OK 䊳 Door key cylinder switch is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2. BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-293
POWER DOOR LOCK

1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch terminals.
SEL034X
OK or NG
쐌 Door key cylinder switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between front power window main switch and door key cyl-
inder switch
If above systems are normal, replace the front power window main switch.
NG 䊳 Replace door key cylinder switch.
EL-294
POWER DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK =NHEL0193S08
1 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “DOOR LOCK” with CONSULT-II. GI
2. Select “ALL D/LK MTR” and touch “ON”.
3. Then, select “DR D/UN MTR” and touch “ON”.
4. Select “NON DR D/UN” and touch “ON”. MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL343W FE
NOTE:
If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step.
AT
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Door lock actuator is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-295
POWER DOOR LOCK
2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

쐌 Front door lock actuator LH
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M145 terminal 54 (GY), 55 (W/B) and ground.
SEL014Y
쐌 Front door lock actuator RH and rear
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M145 terminal 54 (GY), 56 (G/Y) and ground.
SEL015Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
NG 䊳 Replace smart entrance control unit. (Before replacing the control unit, perform “DOOR
LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK”.)
3 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect door lock actuator harness connector.
2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator and check operation.
SEL222W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit connector and door
lock actuator.
NG 䊳 Replace door lock actuator.
EL-296
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

Location NHEL0111
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL054YA
RS
INPUTS
NHEL0194S01
BT
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 and
쐌 to key switch terminal 3 HA
When the key switch is ON (ignition key is inserted in key cylinder), power is supplied
쐌 through key switch terminal 4 SC
When the front door switch LH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
쐌 through front door switch LH terminal 2
쐌 to front door switch LH terminal 3
IDX
rear sunshade).
When the front door switch RH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
쐌 through front door switch RH terminal 2, and
쐌 to front door switch RH terminal 3
쐌 through body grounds B127 and B106.
EL-297
When the rear door switches are ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
쐌 through each rear door switches terminal 1
쐌 to rear door switchs case grounds.
When door lock/unlock switch of front power window main switch is LOCK/UNLOCK, ground is supplied
쐌 through front power window main switch terminals 8 and 5, and
Keyfob signal is inputted to smart entrance control unit (The antenna of the system is combined with smart
entrance control unit).
The remote keyless entry system controls operation of the
쐌 power door lock
쐌 auto door lock
쐌 trunk lid opener
쐌 interior lamp
쐌 panic alarm
쐌 hazard and horn reminder
쐌 power window opener
OPERATED PROCEDURE NHEL0194S02
Power Door Lock Operation NHEL0194S0201
Smart entrance control unit receives a LOCK signal from keyfob. Smart entrance control unit locks all doors
with input of LOCK signal from keyfob.
When an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob once, driver’s door will be unlocked.
Then, if an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob again within 5 seconds, all other door will be unlocked.
Select unlock mode can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-308).
Auto Door Lock Operation NHEL0194S0206
Auto lock function signal is sent for operation when any of the following signals are not sent within 5 minutes
after the unlock signal is sent from the keyfob:
쐌 when door switch is turned ON for open.
쐌 when the ignition switch is turned ON.
쐌 when the lock signal is sent from the keyfob.
Auto door lock mode can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-308).
Hazard and Horn Reminder NHEL0194S0202
쐌 to vehicle security horn relay-1 terminals 1 and 3, and
쐌 to vehicle security horn relay-2 terminal 1
쐌 to horn relay terminal 2
When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK or UNLOCK signal from keyfob with all doors closed, ground
is supplied
Vehicle security horn relay-2 is then energized
쐌 to horn relay terminal 1, and
쐌 through vehicle security horn relay-2 terminals 5 and 3, and
쐌 through body ground E11, E22 and E53
쐌 to smart entrance control unit terminals 47 and 48 from hazard warning lamp system.
Vehicle security horn relay-1 and horn relay are now energized, and hazard warning lamp flashes and horn
sounds as a reminder.
The hazard and horn reminder has six steps.
EL-298
Operating function of hazard and horn reminder
Lock Unlock
Hazard warning lamp Hazard warning lamp

flash
Horn sound
flash
Horn sound GI
C MODE Twice Once Once —
S MODE Twice — — —
MA
MODE 3 — — — —
MODE 4 Twice — Once —

EM
MODE 5 Twice Once — —
LC
MODE 6 — Once Once —
How to change hazard and horn reminder mode EC

With CONSULT-II
Hazard and horn reminder can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-308).
When LOCK and UNLOCK signals are sent from the keyfob for more than 2 seconds at the same time, the
hazard and horn reminder mode is changed and hazard warning lamp flashes and horn sounds as follows:
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL153WA
ST
NOTE:
Reminder mode setting cannot be changed without CONSULT-II for MODES 3,4, 5, and 6. However, C and
S MODES can be changed without CONSULT-II. RS
Interior Lamp Operation NHEL0194S0203
When the following input signals are both supplied: BT
쐌 door switch CLOSED (when all the doors are closed);
쐌 driver’s door LOCKED;
remote keyless entry system turns on interior lamp and key hole illumination (for 30 seconds) with input of HA
UNLOCK signal from keyfob.
For detailed description, refer to “INTERIOR, STEP, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS”
(EL-100). SC
Panic Alarm Operation NHEL0194S0204
When key switch is OFF (when ignition key is not inserted in key cylinder), remote keyless entry system turns
on and off horn and headlamp intermittently with input of PANIC ALARM signal from keyfob.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal
from keyfob. IDX
For detailed description, refer to “VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM” (EL-330).
The panic alarm button’s pressing time on keyfob can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-308).
Trunk Lid Opener Operation NHEL0194S0205
쐌 to trunk lid opener actuator terminal 2.
EL-299
When a TRUNK OPEN signal is sent with key OFF (ignition key removed from key cylinder) from keyfob,
ground is supplied
쐌 to trunk lid opener actuator terminal 1
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminal 63.
Then power and ground are supplied, trunk lid opener actuator opens trunk lid.
The trunk lid opener button’s pressing time on keyfob can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-308).
Power Window Opener Operation NHEL0194S0207
The front power windows open when the unlock button on keyfob is activated and kept pressed for more than
3 seconds with the ignition key OFF. The windows keep opening if the unlock button is continuously pressed.
The power window opening stops when the following operations are carried out:
쐌 When the unlock button is kept pressed more than 15 seconds.
쐌 When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening is operated.
쐌 When the unlock button is released.
The unlock button’s pressing time can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-308).
Door Lock/Unlock and front power window down signal is supplied
쐌 to front power window main switch terminal 8 and
쐌 to front power window switch RH terminal 11.
EL-300
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0171
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL349O
EL-301
Wiring Diagram — KEYLES —
Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — NHEL0114

FIG. 1 NHEL0114S01
MEL636Q
EL-302
Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NHEL0114S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL583P
EL-303
FIG. 3 NHEL0114S05
MEL637Q
EL-304
FIG. 4 NHEL0114S06
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL638Q
EL-305
SEL580YA
EL-306

“MULTI REMOTE ENT” NHEL0241S01
MA
EM
SEF289X

EC
FE
AT
SKIA3098E

SU
BR
ST
SEL398Y
RS
6. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.
BT
HA
SC
SEL401Y

are available. IDX
SEL274W
EL-307

“MULTI REMOTE ENT” NHEL0242S01
IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.
DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch.
DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch RH.
LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch.
LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.
UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.
TRUNK BTN/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob.
PANIC BTN Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from keyfob.
UN BUTTON ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock switch form keyfob.
LK/UN BTN ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock/unlock signal at the same time from keyfob.
INT/IGN ILLUM This test is able to check interior lamp and ignition key hole illumination operation. The interior
lamp and ignition key hole illumination are turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is
touched.
HAZARD This test is able to check hazard reminder operation. The hazard lamp turns on when “ON” on
CONSULT-II screen is touched.
TRUNK OUTPUT This test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator operation. The trunk is unlocked when “ON”
on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
HORN This test is able to check panic alarm and horn reminder operations. The alarm activate for 0.5
seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
HEAD LAMP This test is able to check headlamps panic alarm operation. The headlamp illuminates for 0.5
PW REMOTE DOWN SET This test is able to check power window open operation. The front power windows activate for
10 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
REMO CONT ID CONFIR It can be checked whether keyfob ID code is registered or not in this mode.
REMO CONT ID REGIST Keyfob ID code can be registered.
REMO CONT ID ERASUR Keyfob ID code can be erased.
MULTI ANSWER BACK SET Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed with this mode. Selects hazard and horn
reminder mode among six steps (EL-298).
EL-308
CONSULT-II Application Items (Cont’d)
AUTO LOCK SET Auto door lock mode can be selected among the following periods:
쐌 MODE 1 (5 min.)/MODE 2 (OFF-Mode)/MODE 3 (1 min.)
GI
PANIC ALARM SET The panic alarm button’s pressing time on keyfob can be selected among the following periods:
쐌 MODE 1 (0.5 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF-Mode)/MODE 3 (1.5 sec.)
TRUNK OPENER The trunk lid opener button’s pressing time on keyfob can be selected among the following peri- MA
ods:
쐌 MODE 1 (0.5 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF-Mode)/MODE 3 (1.5 sec.)
EM
PW DOWN SET The unlock button’s pressing time on keyfob can be selected among the following periods:
쐌 MODE 1 (3 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF-Mode)/MODE 3 (5 sec.)
LC
EC
FE
AT
Trouble Diagnoses AX
NHEL0195
NOTE: SU
쐌 Always check keyfob battery before replacing keyfob.
쐌 The panic alarm operation and trunk lid opener operation of
keyfob system do not activate with the ignition key inserted in BR
the ignition key cylinder.
Reference ST
Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure page
(EL- )
All function of remote keyless entry system do not 1. Keyfob battery and function check 311 RS
operate.
2. Power supply and ground circuit for smart entrance control 312
unit check BT
3. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 324
NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is
OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. HA
The new ID of keyfob cannot be entered. 1. Keyfob battery and function check 311
2. Key switch (insert) check 316 SC

3. Door switch check 314
4. Door lock/unlock switch LH check 317
5. Power supply and ground circuit for smart entrance control 312
unit check IDX
OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.
Door lock or unlock does not function. 1. Keyfob battery and function check 311
(If the power door lock system does not operate
manually, check power door lock system. Refer to 2. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 324
EL-288.) NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is
EL-309
Reference
Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure page
(EL- )
Hazard and horn reminder does not activate prop- 1. Keyfob battery and function check 311
erly when pressing lock or unlock button of key-
fob. 2. Hazard reminder check 319
3. Horn reminder check* 320

*: Horn chirp can be activated or deactivated.
First check the horn chirp setting. Refer to “System Description”,
EL-297.

Interior lamp and key hole illumination operation 1. Interior lamp operation check 322
do not activate properly.
2. Key hole illumination operation check 323
Panic alarm (horn and headlamp) does not acti- 1. Keyfob battery and function check 311
vate when panic alarm button is continuously
pressed. 2. Theft warning operation check. Refer to “PRELIMINARY 344
CHECK” in “VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM”.
3. Key switch (insert) check 316

Trunk lid does not open when trunk opener button 1. Keyfob battery and function check 311
is continuously pressed.
2. Trunk lid opener actuator check 318
3. Key switch (insert) check 316

EL-310
KEYFOB BATTERY AND FUNCTION CHECK =NHEL0195S02
1 CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY

Remove battery (refer to EL-327) and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−).
Voltage [V]: GI
2.5 - 3.0
NOTE:
Keyfob does not function if battery is not set correctly. MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL237W FE
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2. AT
NG 䊳 Replace battery.
AX
2 CHECK KEYFOB FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
Check keyfob function (“LK BUTTON/SIG”, “UN BUTTON/SIG”, “TRUNK BTN/SIG”, “PANIC BTN”, “UN BUTTON ON” and
SU
“LK/UN BTN ON”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL423Y
OK or NG HA
OK 䊳 Keyfob is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to “SYMPTOM CHART”, EL-309.
NG 䊳 Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. SC
IDX
EL-311
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NHEL0195S03
1 CHECK MAIN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M145 terminal 49 (R/B) or 51 (W/R) and ground.
SEL018Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
쐌 40A fusible link (letter I, located in fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 E90 circuit breaker
2 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH “ACC” CIRCUIT

2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 26 (PU) and ground while ignition
switch is “ACC”.
SEL019Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
EL-312
3 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminals 43 (B) or M145 terminal 64 (B)
and ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL020Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-302. EC
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Power supply and ground circuits are OK. FE
NG 䊳 Check ground harness.
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-313
DOOR SWITCH CHECK =NHEL0195S04
1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-RR”, “DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
SEL024Y
Without CONSULT-II
ground.
SEL021YC
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Door switch is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
EL-314
2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

1. Disconnect door switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door switch terminals.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL900Y
OK or NG
EC
쐌 Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-315
KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK =NHEL0195S05

With CONSULT-II
SEL315W
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector E144 terminals 25 (B/R) and ground.
SEL022Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Key switch is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.

Check continuity between key switch harness connector E154 terminals 3 and 4.
SEL549YA
OK or NG
EL-316
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LH CHECK =NHEL0195S06

With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL341W EC
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition switch. FE
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after door lock/unlock AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL396Y
OK or NG RS
NG 䊳 Check the following. BT
쐌 Ground circuit for each front power window switch.
entrance control unit connector HA
SC
IDX
EL-317
TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CHECK =NHEL0195S12
1 CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER

Check trunk lid opener operation with trunk lid opener switch.
NOTE: First check trunk lid opener cancel lever position.
Does trunk lid open?
Yes 䊳 GO TO 2.
No 䊳 Check trunk lid opener actuator and the circuit.
2 CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “TRUNK OUTPUT” and touch “ON”.
SEL345W
NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step.
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Trunk lid opener actuator circuit is OK.
NG 䊳 Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk lid
opener actuator.
3 CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

Without CONSULT-II
2. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M145 terminal 63 (L).
SEL026Y
Does trunk lid open?
No 䊳 Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk lid
opener actuator.
EL-318
HAZARD REMINDER CHECK =NHEL0195S08
1 CHECK HAZARD INDICATOR

Check if hazard indicator flashes with hazard switch.
GI
Does hazard indicator operate?
Yes 䊳 GO TO 2.
MA
No 䊳 Check “hazard indicator” circuit.
2 CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION WITH CONSULT-II EM

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II. LC
2. Select “HAZARD” and touch “ON”.
EC
FE
AT
AX
SEL347W
OK or NG SU
OK 䊳 Hazard reminder operation is OK.
NG 䊳 Replace smart entrance control unit. BR
3 CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION WITHOUT CONSULT-II ST

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 47 (G/B) or 48 (G/Y) and ground.
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL581Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 System is OK. IDX
NG 䊳 Replace smart entrance control unit.
EL-319
HORN REMINDER CHECK =NHEL0195S09
1 CHECK HORN
Check if horn sounds with horn switch.
Does horn operate?
Yes 䊳 GO TO 2.
No 䊳 Check horn circuit.
2 CHECK HORN REMINDER OPERATION WITH CONSULT-II

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “HORN” and touch “ON”.
SEL451Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Horn reminder operation is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 4.
3 CHECK HORN REMINDER OPERATION WITHOUT CONSULT-II

Without CONSULT-II
2. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 42 (BR/Y).
SEL028Y
Does horn sound?
No 䊳 GO TO 4.
EL-320
4 CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAY-2

Check vehicle security horn relay-2.
OK or NG
GI
OK 䊳 GO TO 5.
NG 䊳 Replace vehicle security horn relay-2.
MA
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAY-2
1. Disconnect vehicle security horn relay-2 harness connector.
EM
2. Check voltage between vehicle security horn relay-2 harness connector E63 terminal 1 (G/R) and ground.
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL031Y
Does battery voltage exist? AX

Yes 䊳 GO TO 6.
No 䊳 Check the following.
쐌 10A fuse [No. 61, located in fuse and fusible link box]
SU
쐌 Harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relay-2 and fuse
BR
6 CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAY-2
1. Disconnect vehicle security horn relay-2 harness connector. ST
2. Check voltage between vehicle security horn relay-2 harness connector E63 terminals 5 (G) and 3 (B).
RS
BT
HA
SEL032Y
SC
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and vehicle secu-
rity horn relay-2.
NG 䊳 Check the following. IDX
쐌 Harness for open or short between horn relay and vehicle security horn relay-2
쐌 Harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relay-2 and body grounds
EL-321
INTERIOR LAMP OPERATION CHECK =NHEL0195S10
1 CHECK INTERIOR LAMP

Check if the interior lamp switch is in the “ON” position and the lamp illuminates.
Does interior lamp illuminate?
Yes 䊳 GO TO 2.
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and interior lamp
쐌 Interior lamp
2 CHECK INTERIOR LAMP OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “INT/IGN ILLUM” and touch “ON”.
SEL349W
Without CONSULT-II
Push unlock button of keyfob with all doors closed and driver’s door locked, and check voltage between smart entrance
control unit harness connector M144 terminal 31 (R) and ground.
SEL029Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 System is OK.
NG 䊳 Check harness open or short between smart entrance control unit and interior lamp.
EL-322
KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION OPERATION CHECK NHEL0195S13
1 CHECK KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” IN “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II. GI
2. Select “INT/IGN ILLUM” and touch “ON”.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL350W
FE
Without CONSULT-II
Push unlock button of keyfob with all doors closed and driver’s door locked, and check voltage between smart entrance
control unit harness connector M144 terminal 30 (R/Y) and ground. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL030Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-302. ST
OK or NG
OK 䊳 System is OK. RS
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key hole illumina- BT
tion.
쐌 Key hole illumination
HA
SC
IDX
EL-323
ID Code Entry Procedure
ID Code Entry Procedure =NHEL0117

KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II NHEL0117S01
NOTE:
If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be
erased to prevent unauthorized use. When the ID code of a
lost keyfob is not known, all keyfob ID codes should be
erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all
remaining and/or new keyfob must be re-registered.

SEF289X

SKIA3098E

SEL398Y
6. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.
SEL401Y
EL-324
ID Code Entry Procedure (Cont’d)
7. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”.
GI
MA
EM
SEL274W
8. The items are shown on the figure at left can be set up. LC
쐌 “REMO CONT ID CONFIR”
Use this mode to confirm if a keyfob ID code is registered or
not. EC
쐌 “REMO CONT ID REGIST”
Use this mode to register a keyfob ID code.
NOTE: FE
Register the ID code when keyfob or smart entrance control
unit is replaced, or when additional keyfob is required.
쐌 “REMO CONT ID ERASUR”
AT
SEL424Y Use this mode to erase a keyfob ID code.
Refer to the EL-308 “Work Support” in “CONSULT-II Application AX
Items” for the following items.
쐌 “MULTI ANSWER BACK SET”
쐌 “AUTO LOCK SET” SU
쐌 “PANIC ALARM SET”
쐌 “TRUNK OPENER” BR
쐌 “PW DOWN SET”
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-325
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II NHEL0117S02
SEL170Y
EL-326
NOTE:
쐌 If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased
to prevent unauthorized use. A specific ID code can be erased
with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob
is not known, all keyfob ID codes should be erased. After all GI
ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new
keyfob must be re-registered.
To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code (keyfob) MA
four times. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all
remaining and/or new keyfob must be re-registered.
쐌 When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in
EM
memory may or may not be erased. If four ID codes are stored
in memory, when an additional code is registered, only the
oldest code is erased. If less than four ID codes are stored in
LC
memory, when an additional ID code is registered, the new ID
code is added and no ID codes are erased. EC
쐌 If you need to activate more than two keyfob, repeat the pro-
cedure “Additional ID code entry” for each new keyfob.
쐌 Entry of maximum four ID codes is allowed. When more than FE
four ID codes are entered, the oldest ID code will be erased.
쐌 Even if same ID code that is already in the memory is input,
the same ID code can be entered. The code is counted as an AT
additional code.
Keyfob Battery Replacement AX

NHEL0118
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL411Y
EL-327
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM

Location NHEL0119
SEL552Y
EL-328
System Description

DESCRIPTION NHEL0196S01
1. Operation Flow NHEL0196S0101
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL334W
AX
2. Setting The Vehicle Security System NHEL0196S0102
Initial condition SU
1) Ignition switch is in OFF position.
Disarmed phase
When the vehicle security system is in the disarmed phase, the security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 sec- BR
onds.
Pre-armed phase and armed phase
When the following operation 1) or 2) is performed, the vehicle security system turns into the “pre-armed” ST
phase. (The security indicator lamp illuminates.)
1) Smart entrance control unit receives LOCK signal from key cylinder switch or keyfob after hood, trunk lid
and all doors are closed. RS
2) Hood, trunk lid and all doors are closed after front doors are locked by key, lock/unlock switch or keyfob.
After about 30 seconds, the system automatically shifts into the “armed” phase (the system is set). (The BT
security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 seconds.)
3. Canceling The Set Vehicle Security System NHEL0196S0103 HA
When the following 1) or 2) operation is performed, the armed phase is canceled.
1) Unlock the doors with the key or keyfob.
2) Open the trunk lid with the key or keyfob. SC
4. Activating The Alarm Operation of The Vehicle Security System NHEL0196S0104
Make sure the system is in the armed phase. (The security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 seconds.)
When the following operation 1) or 2) is performed, the system sounds the horns and flashes the headlamps
for about 50 seconds.
1) Engine hood, trunk lid or any door is opened during armed phase. IDX
2) Disconnecting and connecting the battery connector before canceling armed phase.
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND NHEL0196S02
쐌 to security indicator lamp terminal 1.
EL-329
Ground is supplied
INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM NHEL0196S03
The operation of the vehicle security system is controlled by the doors, hood and trunk lid.
Pattern A NHEL0196S0301
To activate the vehicle security system, the smart entrance control unit must receive signals indicating the
doors, hood and trunk lid are closed.
When a door is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 1, 2 or 3 receives a ground signal from each door
switch.
When the hood is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 6 receives a ground signal
쐌 from terminal 1 of the hood switch
When the trunk lid is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 13 receives a ground signal
쐌 from terminal 1 of the trunk room lamp switch
쐌 through body grounds T6 and T8.
When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK signal from key cylinder switch or keyfob and none of the
described conditions exist, the vehicle security system will automatically shift to armed mode.
Pattern B NHEL0196S0302
To activate the vehicle security system, the smart entrance control unit must receive signal indicating any door
(including hood and trunk lid) is opened.
When the front doors are locked with key, lock/unlock switch or keyfob and then all doors are closed, the
vehicle security system will automatically shift to armed mode.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ACTIVATION NHEL0196S04
Pattern A NHEL0196S0401
With all doors (including hood and trunk lid) close if the key is used to lock doors, front power window main
switch terminal 6 receives a ground signal
쐌 from terminal 3 of the key cylinder switch LH
If this signal, or lock signal from keyfob is received by the smart entrance control unit, the vehicle security
system will activate automatically.
NOTE:
Vehicle security system can be set even though all doors are not locked.
Pattern B NHEL0196S0402
With any door (including hood and trunk lid) open if lock/unlock switch is used to lock doors, smart entrance
control unit terminal 33 receives a ground signal
쐌 from terminal 8 of lock/unlock switch LH, or
쐌 from terminal 11 of lock/unlock switch RH
쐌 through body grounds M9, M25 and M87, or
With any door (including hood and trunk lid) open if the key is used to lock doors, front power window main
switch terminal 6 receives a ground signal
쐌 from terminal 3 of the key cylinder switch LH
EL-330
If these signals and lock signal from keyfob are received by the smart entrance control unit, ground signals
of terminals 1, 2 and 3 are interrupted and all doors are closed, the vehicle security system will activate auto-
matically.
NOTE:
Vehicle security system can be set even though the rear door is not locked. GI
Once the vehicle security system has been activated, smart entrance control unit terminal 38 supplies ground
to terminal 2 of the security indicator lamp. MA
The security indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 30 seconds and then blinks every 2.6 seconds.
Now the vehicle security system is in armed phase.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION EM
NHEL0196S05
The vehicle security system is triggered by
쐌 opening a door LC
쐌 opening the hood or the trunk lid
쐌 detection of battery disconnect and connect.
Once the vehicle security system is in armed phase, if the smart entrance control unit receives a ground sig-
EC
nal at terminal 1, 2, 3 (door switch), 13 (trunk room lamp switch) or 6 (hood switch), the vehicle security sys-
tem will be triggered. The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently. FE
쐌 through 10A fuse (No. 61 located in fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 to vehicle security horn relay-1 terminals 1 and 3, and AT
쐌 through 10A fuse (No. 57, located in fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 to horn relay terminal 2.
AX
Power is also supplied at all times
쐌 through 15A fuse (No. 68, located in fuse and fusible link box) SU
쐌 to headlamp LH relay terminal 3,
BR
쐌 to headlamp LH relay terminals 1 and 6,
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminal 3, and ST
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 6.
RS
When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
쐌 to headlamp LH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 21 and
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 59 BT
쐌 through smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64.
HA
When headlamp relays (LH and RH) are energized and then power is supplied to headlamps (LH and RH).
The headlamps flash intermittently.
When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently SC
쐌 to vehicle security horn relay-2 terminal 2.
When vehicle security horn relay-2 is energized, ground is supplied intermittently
쐌 to vehicle security horn relay-1 terminal 2, and
쐌 to horn relay terminal 1. IDX
When vehicle security horn relay-1 and horn relay are energized, then power is supplied to vehicle security
horn and horn.
The horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 50 seconds but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION NHEL0196S06
To deactivate the vehicle security system, a door or trunk lid must be unlocked with the key or keyfob.
When the key is used to unlock the door, front power window main switch terminal 19 receives a ground sig-
nal
EL-331
쐌 from terminal 1 of the key cylinder switch LH.
When the smart entrance control unit receives either one of these signals or unlock signal from keyfob, the
vehicle security system is deactivated. (Disarmed phase)
PANIC ALARM OPERATION NHEL0196S07
Remote keyless entry system may or may not operate vehicle security system (horn and headlamps) as
required.
When the remote keyless entry system (panic alarm) is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
쐌 to vehicle security horn relay-2 terminal 2.
쐌 to headlamp LH relay terminal 2 and
쐌 to headlamp RH relay terminal 2
The headlamp flashes and the horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal
from keyfob.
EL-332
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-333
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0121
MEL639Q
EL-334
Schematic (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL353O
EL-335
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC —
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — NHEL0122

FIG. 1 NHEL0122S01
MEL640Q
EL-336
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NHEL0122S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL641Q
EL-337
FIG. 3 NHEL0122S03
MEL355O
EL-338
FIG. 4 NHEL0122S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL356O
EL-339
FIG. 5 NHEL0122S07
MEL642Q
EL-340
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL553YA
EL-341

“THEFT WAR ALM” NHEL0244S01
SEF289X

SKIA3098E

SEL398Y
6. Touch “THEFT WAR ALM”.
SEL401Y

are available.
SEL274W
EL-342
CONSULT-II Application Item
CONSULT-II Application Item NHEL0245

“THEFT WAR ALM” NHEL0245S01
GI

MA
KEY CYL LK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch.
EM
KEY CYL UN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder switch.
DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch. LC

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. EC

TRUNK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk switch.
HOOD SWITCH Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of hood switch. FE

LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/unlock switch LH and RH.
UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/unlock LH and RH. AT
LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.
UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. AX

TRUNK BTN/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob.
SU
Test Item Description BR

This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when
THEFT IND
ST
This test is able to check vehicle security alarm operation. The alarm will be activated for 0.5
HORN
This test is able to check vehicle security alarm headlamp operation. The headlamp illumi- RS
HEADLAMP
nates for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
Work Support BT
NHEL0245S0103

HA
The switch which triggered vehicle security alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm
THEFT ALM TRG and erase the record of theft waning alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching
“CLEAR” on CONSULT-II screen.
SC
SECURITY ALARM SET This mode is able to confirm and change security alarm ON-OFF setting.
IDX
EL-343
Trouble Diagnoses

The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to
“ACC” at any step between START and ARMED in the following
flow chart.
SEL731WB
For details of “Pattern A” and “Pattern B” about vehicle security

(theft warning) system setting, refer to EL-330.
*: Refer to EL-391.
After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart on
next page.
EL-344
REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 344 346 347 353 355 357 358 309
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN AND HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK

GI
DOOR, HOOD AND TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH CHECK

MA
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
Check “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM”.

EM
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK

SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK
LC
SYMPTOM
EC
PRELIMINARY CHECK
FE
AT
AX
Vehicle security indicator does not
X X X
illuminate for 30 seconds.
SU
All items X X X
Vehicle security
system cannot
be set by ....
1
Door outside key X X
BR
Lock/unlock switch X X
Keyfob X X
ST
*1 Vehicle security
system does not
alarm when ...
One of the door is

RS
2 X X
opened
BT
Vehicle security
alarm does not
HA
activate.
Horn or headlamp
3 X X X
alarm
SC
system cannot be
Vehicle security
canceled by ....
Door outside key X X
4
IDX
Keyfob X X
X : Applicable
*1: Make sure the system is in the armed phase.
Before starting trouble diagnoses above, perform preliminary
check, EL-344.
Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of
preliminary check.
EL-345
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0123S03
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness
connector M144 terminals 26 (PU), 27 (G), M145 terminal 49
(R/B) and ground.
SEL582Y
Ground Circuit Check NHEL0123S0302

2. Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness
connector M144 terminal 43 (B), M145 terminal 64 (B) and
ground.
SEL034Y
EL-346
DOOR, HOOD AND TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH
CHECK =NHEL0123S04
Door Switch Check NHEL0123S0401
1 PRELIMINARY CHECK GI
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and remove key from ignition key cylinder.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should blink every 2.6 seconds. MA
2. Close all doors, hood and trunk lid.
3. Lock doors with keyfob from inside the vehicle.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn on for 30 seconds. EM
4. Unlock any door with the door lock knob and open the door within 30 seconds after door is locked.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn off.
OK or NG LC
OK 䊳 Door switch is OK, and go to hood switch check.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2. EC
2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL FE

With CONSULT-II
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-RR”, “DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL024Y ST
Without CONSULT-II
ground.
RS
BT
HA
SC
SEL021YC
OK or NG IDX
OK 䊳 Door switch is OK, and go to hood switch check.
NG 䊳 GO TO 3.
EL-347
3 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

1. Disconnect door switch connector.
2. Check continuity between door switch terminals.
SEL900Y
OK or NG
쐌 Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition
EL-348
Hood Switch Check =NHEL0123S0402
1 PRELIMINARY CHECK
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should blink every 2.6 seconds. GI
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn on for 30 seconds. MA
4. Unlock hood with hood opener within 30 seconds after door is locked.
EM
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Hood switch is OK, and go to trunk room lamp switch check.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
LC
2 CHECK HOOD SWITCH FITTING CONDITION EC

OK or NG
FE
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
NG 䊳 Adjust installation of hood switch or hood.
AT
3 CHECK HOOD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II AX
Check hood switch (“HOOD SWITCH”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL354W
Without CONSULT-II BT
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 6 (Y/R) and ground.
HA
SC
SEL035YA
IDX
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Hood switch is OK, and go to trunk room lamp switch check.
NG 䊳 GO TO 4.
EL-349
4 CHECK HOOD SWITCH

1. Disconnect hood switch connector.
2. Check continuity between hood switch terminals 1 and 2.
SEL240W
OK or NG
쐌 Hood switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and hood switch
NG 䊳 Replace hood switch.
EL-350
Trunk Room Lamp Switch Check =NHEL0123S0403
1 PRELIMINARY CHECK
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should blink every 2.6 seconds. GI
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn on for 30 seconds. MA
4. Open trunk lid with trunk lid opener switch (on driver side door trim) within 30 seconds after door is locked.
EM
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Trunk room lamp switch is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
LC
2 CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL EC

With CONSULT-II
Check trunk room lamp switch (“TRUNK SW”), in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. FE
AT
AX
SU
SEL355W
BR
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 13 (PU/Y) and ground.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEL036Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-336. SC
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Trunk room lamp switch is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 3.
IDX
EL-351
3 CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH

1. Disconnect trunk room lamp switch connector.
2. Check continuity between trunk room lamp switch terminals 1 and 2.
SEL242W
OK or NG
쐌 Trunk room lamp switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk room lamp
switch
NG 䊳 Replace trunk room lamp switch.
EL-352
SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK =NHEL0123S05
1 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “THEFT WAR ALM” with CONSULT-II. GI
2. Select “THEFT IND” and touch “ON”.
MA
EM
LC
SEL356W
EC
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 38 (G/OR) and ground.
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL037Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-336. ST
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Security indicator lamp is OK.
RS
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
BT
2 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
OK or NG HA
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
NG 䊳 Replace security indicator lamp.
SC
IDX
EL-353
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP

1. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector.
2. Check voltage between security indicator lamp terminal 1 and ground.
SEL653WA
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and smart entrance
control unit.
쐌 Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and fuse
EL-354
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK =NHEL0123S07

With CONSULT-II
Check front door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT- GI
II.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL342W
scope when key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after key is turned to AT
“LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL397Y
OK or NG RS
OK 䊳 Door key cylinder switch is OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2. BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-355

1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch connector.
2. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch connector terminals.
SEL034X
OK or NG
쐌 Door key cylinder switch ground circuit
쐌 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door key cylinder
switch
NG 䊳 Replace door key cylinder switch.
EL-356
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK NHEL0123S13

With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL341W EC
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition switch. FE
scope when door lock/unlock switch is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after door lock/unlock AT
switch is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL396Y
OK or NG RS
NG 䊳 Check the following. BT
쐌 Ground circuit for front power window switch.
쐌 Harness for open or short between front power window switch and smart entrance
control unit. HA
If above systems are normal, replace front power window switch.
SC
IDX
EL-357
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN AND HEADLAMP ALARM
CHECK =NHEL0123S09
1 CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN AND HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION WITH CONSULT-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “THEFT WAR ALM” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “HORN” and touch “ON”.
SEL041Y
3. Select “HEADLAMP” and touch “ON”.
SEL042Y
NOTE:
If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the nest step.
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Vehicle security horn and headlamp alarm operation are OK.
NG 䊳 GO TO 2.
EL-358
2 CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN AND HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION WITHOUT CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
2. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 42 (BR/Y). GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL043YA EC
3. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 and M145 terminal 21 (OR) and 59 (P).
FE
AT
AX
SU
SEL198Y
BR
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Horn and headlamp alarm is OK.
ST
NG 䊳 GO TO 3.
3 CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAYS

RS
Check vehicle security horn relay-1 and relay-2.
OK or NG
BT
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
NG 䊳 Replace. HA
SC
IDX
EL-359
4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAYS

1. Disconnect vehicle security horn relay-1 and relay-2 connectors.
2. Check voltage between vehicle security horn relay-1 and relay-2 terminal 1 and ground.
SEL044Y
Does battery voltage exist?

Yes 䊳 GO TO 5.
쐌 10A fuse (No. 61 located in the fuse and fusible link box)
쐌 Harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relays and fuse
5 CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAYS CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect vehicle security horn relay-1 and relay-2 connectors.
2. Check voltage between vehicle security horn relay-1 and relay-2 terminals of each relay.
Battery voltage should exist.
SEL045Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relay-2 and headlamp
relays.
쐌 Harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relay-1 and relay-2
쐌 Harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relay-1 and vehicle security
horn
EL-360
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Description
OUTLINE NHEL0124S01
The smart entrance control unit totally controls the following body electrical system operations.
쐌 Heated steering GI
쐌 Headlamp system
쐌 Warning chime
MA
쐌 Rear defogger and door mirror defogger
쐌 Power door lock
쐌 Remote keyless entry system EM
쐌 Vehicle security system
쐌 Interior lamp
LC
In addition, the following timer operations are controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
쐌 Battery saver control
쐌 Retained power control EC
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL NHEL0124S05
Headlamps/Parking Lamps/License Lamps/Tail Lamps/Fog Lamps/Illumination LampsNHEL0124S0501 FE
While the headlamp is turned ON by “1st” or “2ND” step of light switch, the 5 minute timer is activated when
the ignition switch signal changes from ON (or START) to OFF (ACC OFF). The headlamps (including parking,
license, tail, fog and illumination lamps) are turned off after 5 minutes. AT
switch signal changes from ON (or START) to OFF (ACC OFF), and either one of LH or RH front door switch
ON signal is input. AX
쐌 When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the timer is activated, the timer in operation SU
ued and the 45 second timer is reset. BR
쐌 When all the door switch ON signals are input while the timer is activated, the timer is discontinued and ST
Exterior lamp battery saver control mode and auto light delay off timer period can be changed by the function RS
setting of CONSULT-II.
Interior Lamp/Spot Lamp/Vanity Mirror Illumination NHEL0124S0502
The lamps turn off automatically when the interior lamp, spot lamp or/and vanity mirror illumination are illumi- BT
nated with the ignition key in the OFF position, if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open signal or if the
lamp switch is in the ON position for more than 30 minutes.
After lamps are turned off by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when: HA
쐌 Driver’s door is locked or unlocked with keyfob, door lock/unlock switch or door key cylinder.
쐌 Ignition switch is turned to ON. SC
쐌 Door is opened or closed,
쐌 Key is inserted into ignition key cylinder.
Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II.
Rear Window Defogger/Door Mirror Defogger NHEL0124S0503
Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger are turned off in approximately 15 minutes after the rear win- IDX
dow defogger switch is turned on.
Heated Steering NHEL0124S0504
Heated steering is turned off in approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering switch is turned ON.
RETAINED POWER CONTROL NHEL0124S06
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF (or ACC) position from ON or START position, the following sys-
tems can be operated for 45 seconds by the RAP signal from the smart entrance control unit terminal 46.
쐌 Electric sunroof
EL-361
쐌 Power window
RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT-II.
INPUT/OUTPUT NHEL0124S04
System Input Output
Door lock and unlock switch LH and RH

Key switch (Insert)
Power door lock Door lock actuator
Door switches
Door key cylinder switches
Horn relay
Vehicle security horn relay-1
Key switch (Insert)
Ignition switch (ACC)
Hazard warning lamp
Remote keyless entry Door switches
Interior lamp
Keyfob signal
Ignition key hole illumination
Door lock/unlock switch LH
Door lock actuator
Trunk lid opener actuator
Key switch (Insert)

Ignition switch (ON)
Warning chime (located in smart entrance
Warning chime Lighting switch (1st)
control unit)
Seat belt switch (driver’s seat)
Front door switch LH
Rear window defogger and Ignition switch (ON)

Rear window defogger relay
door mirror defogger Rear window defogger switch
Ignition switch (ACC, ON)

Door switches
Hood switch
Vehicle security Headlamp relay
Trunk room lamp switch
Security indicator
Door lock/unlock switches
Door key cylinder switch (lock/unlock)
Door switches
Keyfob signal (lock/unlock) Interior lamp
Door lock/unlock switches (lock/unlock) Key hole illumination
Interior lamp
Door key cylinder switch (lock/unlock) Step lamp
Ignition switch (ON) Door indicator
Key system
Headlamps
Battery saver control for Parking lamps
headlamps/parking lamps/ License lamps
Front door switches
licence lamps/tail lamps/fog Tail lamps
Lighting switch
lamps/illumination lamps Fog lamps
Illumination lamps
Interior lamps
Battery saver control for inte- Ignition switch (ON)
Step lamp
rior lamp/step lamp/spot lamp/ Front door switches
Spot lamp
vanity mirror illumination Lighting switch
Vanity mirror illumination
Battery saver control for rear

window defogger and door Rear window defogger relay
Rear window defogger switch
mirror defogger
Retained power control for Ignition switch (ON)

Sunroof motor
electric sunroof Front door switches
Retained power control for Ignition switch (ON)

Power window relay
power window Front door switches

Heated steering Heated steering relay
Heated steering switches
EL-362
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II =NHEL0247
DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION NHEL0247S01
Item (CONSULT-II Diagnosed system DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST WORK SUPPORT
screen terms)
GI
DOOR LOCK Power door lock X X X
REAR DEFOGGER Rear window defogger X X

MA
KEY WARN ALM Warning chime X X
EM
LIGHT WARN ALM Warning chime X X
SEAT BELT ALM Warning chime X X

LC
INT LAMP Interior lamps X X X
BATTERY SAVER Battery saver control for

interior lamp
X X X EC
THEFT WAR ALM Vehicle security system X X X
RETAINED PWR Retained power control X X X

FE
MULTI REMOTE ENT Remote keyless entry
X X X
system AT
HEADLAMP Headlamp X X X
X: Applicable AX
For diagnostic item in each control system, refer to the relevant pages for each system.
DIAGNOSTIC ITEM DESCRIPTION NHEL0247S02

SU
MODE Description
DATA MONITOR Input/output data in the smart entrance control unit can be BR
read.
ACTIVE TEST Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some sys- ST
tems apart from the smart entrance control unit.
WORK SUPPORT for DOOR LOCK 쐌 Select unlock mode ON-OFF setting can be changed.
쐌 Key reminder door mode ON-OFF setting can be changed. RS
WORK SUPPORT for INT LAMP Interior lamp timer mode ON-OFF setting can be changed.
WORK SUPPORT for BATTERY SAVER Interior lamp battery saver period can be changed. BT
WORK SUPPORT for THEFT WAR ALM 쐌 The recorded trigger signal when vehicle security system
was activated can be checked. HA
쐌 Security alarm ON-OFF setting can be changed.
WORK SUPPORT for RETAINED PWR SET RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed.
SC
WORK SUPPORT for MULTI REMOTE ENT 쐌 ID code of keyfob can be registered and erased.
쐌 Keyless answer back mode can be changed.
쐌 Pressing time of panic alarm, trunk lid opener and door
unlock (for power window down operation) buttons on keyfob
can be changed.
쐌 Auto lock operation starting time can be changed.
IDX
WORK SUPPORT for HEAD LAMP 쐌 Auto light sensitivity can be changed.
쐌 Exterior lamp battery saver control ON-OFF setting can be
changed.
쐌 Auto light delay off time can be changed.
EL-363
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE =NHEL0247S03
1. Turn the ignition switch “OFF”.
SEF289X

SKIA3098E

SEL398Y
6. Perform each diagnostic item according to “DIAGNOSTIC

ITEMS APPLICATION”. Refer to EL-363.
SEL401Y
EL-364
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-365
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0125
MEL358O
EL-366
Schematic (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL359O
EL-367
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table NHEL0126
Voltage
Terminal Wire
Connections Operated condition (Approximate val-
No. color
ues)
1 LG Driver door switch OFF (Closed) , ON (Open) 12V , 0V
2 R/L Passenger door switch OFF (Closed) , ON (Open) 5V , 0V
3 R/W Rear door switch OFF (Closed) , ON (Open) 5V , 0V
4 G Heated steering switch OFF , ON (Only when pushed) 5V , 0V
6 Y/R Hood switch ON (Open) , OFF (Closed) 0V , 12V
Light is applied to auto light sen-

1 to 5V
Ignition switch sor.
7 W/R Auto light sensor (Signal)
ON position Light is not applied to auto light
Less than 1V
sensor.
8 P/B Auto light sensor (GND) — —
9 R Auto light sensor (Power) Ignition switch (OFF , ON) 0V , 5V
13 PU/Y Trunk room lamp switch ON (Open) , OFF (Closed) 0V , 12V
14 G/W Rear window defogger switch OFF , ON (Only when pushed) 5V , 0V
Trunk and fuel lid opener

16 L OFF , ON (Only when pulled) 12V , 0V
switch
More than 5
minutes after
ignition switch is 12V
turned to OFF
Ignition switch ON or START position
(with lighting , OFF position
switch 1ST or Within 5 minutes
19 Y/B Tail lamp relay (Output) 2ND) after ignition
0V
switch is turned
to OFF position
ON or START position 0V
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate Less than 1V ,

, Not operate) 12V
Lighting switch (OFF or AUTO , 1ST or 2ND posi-

20 SB Tail lamp switch 12V , 0V
tion)
More than 5
minutes after
turned to OFF
21 OR Headlamp LH relay Within 5 minutes
switch 2ND)
after ignition
0V
switch is turned
to OFF position
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. 0V
Except PASS or 2ND position 12V

Lighting switch
PASS or 2ND position 0V
22 L/OR Headlamp switch
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate
10V, 12V
, Not operate)
EL-368
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table (Cont’d)
Voltage
Terminal Wire
No. color
ues)
23 L/Y Headlamp switch

Ignition switch Lighting switch (Except AUTO ,
12V , 0V
GI
“ON” position AUTO position)
25 B/R Ignition key switch (Insert) Key inserted , Key removed from IGN key cylinder 12V , 0V
MA
26 PU Ignition switch (ACC) “ACC” position 12V
27 G Ignition switch (ON) Ignition switch is in “ON” position 12V EM

Unfastened , Fastened (Ignition switch is in “ON”
28 OR Seat belt buckle switch 0V , 12V
position)
LC
When doors are unlocked using keyfob (OFF ,
30 R/Y Ignition keyhole illumination 12V , 0V
Unlock)
When doors are locked using keyfob (Unlock , lock EC

31 R Interior lamp 0V , 12V
with lamp switch in “DOOR” position)
32 R/W Front step lamp Any door switch ON (Open) , OFF (Closed) 0V , 12V FE
Door lock & unlock switches (Neutral , Lock/Unlock)
33 L Communication interface Front door key cylinder switch LH (Neutral , Lock/ EL-370 AT
Unlock)
37 G/R Rear window defogger relay OFF , ON (Ignition switch is in “ON” position) 12V , 0V
AX
38 G/OR Security indicator Goes off , Illuminates 12V , 0V
40 B/R Heated steering relay OFF , ON (Ignition switch is in “ON” position) 12 , 0V SU

When panic alarm is operated using keyfob (ON ,
42 BR/Y Vehicle Security horn relay 12V , 0V
OFF)
BR
43 B Ground — —
46 PU Power window relay Retained power operation is operated (ON , OFF) 12V , 0V
ST
When door lock or unlock is operated using keyfob
47 G/B LH turn signal lamp 12V , 0V
(ON , OFF)
When door lock or unlock is operated using keyfob

RS
48 G/Y RH turn signal lamp 12V , 0V
(ON , OFF)
49 R/B Power source (Fuse) — 12V BT

Battery saver operates , Does not operate (ON
50 R/G Battery saver (Interior lamp) 12V , 0V
,OFF)
HA
51 W/R Power source (PTC) — 12V
54 GY Door lock actuators Door lock & unlock switch (Free , Lock) 0V , 12V
SC
55 W/B Driver door lock actuator Door lock & unlock switch (Free , Unlock) 0V , 12V
Passenger and rear doors

56 G/Y Door lock & unlock switch (Free , Unlock) 0V , 12V
lock actuator
IDX
EL-369
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table (Cont’d)
Voltage
Terminal Wire
No. color
ues)
More than 5
minutes after
turned to OFF
switch 1ST or Within 5 minutes
57 Y/B Tail lamp relay 2ND) after ignition
0V
switch is turned
to OFF position
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate Less than 1V ,

, Not operate) 12V
58 SB Tail lamp switch Lighting switch (OFF or AUTO , 1ST or 2ND) 12V , 0V
More than 5
minutes after
turned to OFF
Within 5 minutes
59 P Headlamp RH relay switch 2ND)
after ignition
0V
switch is turned
to OFF position
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. Less than 1V ,

(Operate , Not operate) 12V
Except PASS or 2ND position 12V

Lighting switch
PASS or 2ND position 0V
60 LG/R Headlamp switch
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate
10V , 12V
, Not operate)
When trunk lid opener actuator is operated using

63 L Trunk lid opener actuator 0V , 12V
keyfob. (ON , OFF)
64 B Ground — —
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SIGNAL NHEL0126S01

Voltage:
12 V → 9V (10 sec.) measurement by analog circuit
tester.
SEL412Y
EL-370
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV —
Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV — NHEL0127
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL643Q
IDX
SEL983XA
EL-371
Trouble Diagnoses

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NHEL0128S01
SYMPTOM: Homelink universal transceiver does not activate
receiver.
Before conducting the procedure given below, make sure that sys-
tem receiver (garage door opener, etc.) operates with original,
hand-held transmitter. If NG, receiver or hand-held transmitter is
malfunctioning, not vehicle related.
1 PRELIMINARY CHECK
2. Does red light (LED) of homelink universal transceiver illuminate when any button is pressed?
SEL442UA
Yes or No
Yes 䊳 GO TO 2.
No 䊳 GO TO 3.
2 CHECK HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER FUNCTION

Check homelink universal transceiver with Tool.
For details, refer to Technical Service Bulletin.
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Receiver or handheld transmitter is malfunctioning, not vehicle related.
NG 䊳 Replace homelink universal transceiver with sun visor assembly.
EL-372
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY

1. Disconnect homelink universal transceiver connector.
3. Check voltage between homelink universal transceiver harness connector R4 terminal 1 (R/G) and body ground. GI
(Within 10 minutes after turn ignition switch “OFF”.)
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL367WB
OK or NG
FE
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
NG 䊳 GO TO 5.
AT
4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between homelink universal transceiver harness connector R4 terminal 2 (B) and ground.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL368WB
RS
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Replace homelink universal transceiver with sun visor assembly. BT
NG 䊳 Repair harness.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-373
5 CHECK MAIN POWER SUPPLY FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M145 terminal 49 (R/B) and ground.
SEL284Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 6.
6 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 43 (B) or M145 terminal 64 (B)
and ground.
SEL285Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and homelink uni-
versal transceiver.
NG 䊳 Check ground harness.
EL-374
IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)

Location NHEL0172
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
SEL054X BR
NOTE:
If customer reports a “No Start” condition, request ALL KEYS to be brought to an INFINITI dealer in ST
case of an IVIS (NATS) malfunction.
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-375
System Description

IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) has the following immobilizer functions:
쐌 Since only IVIS (NATS) ignition keys, whose ID nos. have been registered into the ECM and IMMU of IVIS
(NATS), allow the engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without a IVIS (NATS) registered key is pre-
vented by IVIS (NATS).
That is to say, IVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key
of IVIS (NATS).
쐌 All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs (except for card plate key) have been IVIS (NATS) registered.
If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the IVIS (NATS) com-
ponents.
쐌 The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” position. Therefore, IVIS (NATS)
warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system.
쐌 When IVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition key is in the “ON”
position.
쐌 IVIS (NATS) trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other IVIS (NATS) igni-
tion key IDs must be carried out using CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II IVIS (NATS) software.
Regarding the procedures of IVIS (NATS) initialization and IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer
to CONSULT-II operation manual, IVIS/NVIS.
쐌 When servicing a malfunction of the IVIS (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator Lamp) or
registering another IVIS ignition key ID no., it is necessary to re-register original key identification.
Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner.
System Composition NHEL0174
The immobilizer function of the IVIS (NATS) consists of the following:
쐌 IVIS (NATS) ignition key
쐌 IVIS (NATS) immobilizer control unit (IMMU) located in the ignition key cylinder
쐌 Engine control module (ECM)
쐌 Security indicator
SEL085WC
EL-376
Wiring Diagram — NATS —
Wiring Diagram — NATS — NHEL0175
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
MEL644Q
IDX
SEL984XA
EL-377
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II NHEL0176
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE NHEL0176S01
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
SEF289X
3. Insert IVIS (NATS) program card into CONSULT-II.

: Program card
NATS (AEN02C)
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Touch “START”.
PBR455D
6. Select “NATS V.5.0”.

If “NATS V.5.0” is not indicated, go to GI-42.
SEL851W
7. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual, IVIS/NVIS.
SEL728W
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION NHEL0176S02

CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Description
MODE
C/U INITIALIZATION When replacing any of the following three components, C/U initialization and re-registration
of all IVIS (NATS) ignition keys are necessary.
[IVIS (NATS) ignition key/IMMU/ECM]
SELF-DIAG RESULTS Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart EL-379.
EL-378
NOTE:
쐌 When any initialization is performed, all ID previously reg-
istered will be erased and all IVIS (NATS) ignition keys
must be registered again.
쐌 The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this GI
case, the system will show “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” or “LOCK
MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-II screen.
MA
쐌 In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored as a
self-diagnostic result during key registration procedure, even if
the system is not malfunctioning. EM
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS NHEL0176S03
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL364X
ST
IVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART
NHEL0176S04
P No. Code Malfunction is detected when .....

Detected items (NATS program card (Self-diag-
RS
Reference page
screen terms) nostic result
of “ENGINE”
BT
NATS MAL- The malfunction of ECM internal circuit of IMMU com-
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU FUNCTION munication line is detected. EL-383
P1613 HA
Communication impossible between ECM and IMMU
NATS MAL-
(In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU FUNCTION
during key registration procedure, even if the system is
EL-384 SC
P1612
not malfunctioning.)
NATS MAL- IMMU can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID
DIFFERENCE OF KEY FUNCTION verification between key ID and IMMU is NG. EL-388
P1615
NATS MAL- IMMU cannot receive the key ID signal. IDX

CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY FUNCTION EL-389
P1614
NATS MAL- The result of ID verification between IMMU and ECM is

ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM FUNCTION NG. System initialization is required. EL-390
P1611
EL-379
P No. Code Malfunction is detected when .....

Detected items (NATS program card (Self-diag-
Reference page
screen terms) nostic result
of “ENGINE”
When the starting operation is carried out five or more

times consecutively under the following conditions, IVIS
NATS MAL-
(NATS) will shift the mode to one which prevents the
LOCK MODE FUNCTION EL-393
engine from being started.
P1610
쐌 Unregistered ignition key is used.
쐌 IMMU or ECM’s malfunctioning.
DON’T ERASE BEFORE All engine trouble codes except IVIS (NATS) trouble
— EL-381
CHECKING ENG DIAG code has been detected in ECM.
EL-380
Trouble Diagnoses

GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
SEL024X
EL-381
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 NHEL0177S02
(Self-diagnosis related item)
Displayed “SELF-DIAG DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- SYSTEM REFERENCE PART NO.
SYMPTOM RESULTS” on CON- DURE (Malfunctioning part or OF ILLUSTRATION ON
SULT-II screen. (Reference page) mode) NEXT PAGE
PROCEDURE 1
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU ECM B
(EL-383)
In rare case, “CHAIN

OF ECM-IMMU” might
be stored during key
—
registration procedure,
even if the system is
not malfunctioning.
Open circuit in battery

voltage line of IMMU C1
circuit
Open circuit in ignition

C2
line of IMMU circuit
Open circuit in ground

C3
line of IMMU circuit
PROCEDURE 2
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
(EL-384) Open circuit in commu-
nication line between C4
IMMU and ECM
Short circuit between

쐌 Security indicator IMMU and ECM com-
C4
lighting up* munication line and bat-
쐌 Engine hard to start tery voltage line
Short circuit between

IMMU and ECM com-
C4
munication line and
ground line
ECM B
IMMU A
PROCEDURE 3 Unregistered key D

DIFFERENCE OF KEY
(EL-388) IMMU A
Malfunction of key ID
PROCEDURE 4 E
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY chip
(EL-389)
IMMU A
System initialization has

ID DISCORD, IMM- PROCEDURE 5 not yet been com- F
ECM (EL-390) pleted.
ECM F
PROCEDURE 7
LOCK MODE LOCK MODE D
(EL-393)
Engine trouble data and

쐌 MIL staying ON DON’T ERASE
WORK FLOW IVIS (NATS) trouble
쐌 Security indicator BEFORE CHECKING —
(EL-381) data have been
lighting up* ENG DIAG
detected in ECM
*: When IVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position.
EL-382
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 NHEL0177S03
(Non self-diagnosis related item)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYSTEM
SYMPTOM
(Reference page) (Malfunctioning part or mode) GI
Security ind.
PROCEDURE 6 Open circuit between Fuse and IMMU MA

Security ind. does not light up.
(EL-391) Continuation of initialization mode
IMMU EM
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM NHEL0177S04 LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL087WD
ST
RS
Self-diagnostic results:
“ECM INT CIRC-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen BT
1. Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ECM INT CIRC-
IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Ref. part No. B.
2. Replace ECM. HA
3. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual SC
IVIS/NVIS”.
SEL314W
IDX
EL-383
“CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
NOTE:
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not mal-
functioning.
SEL292W
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?

Yes 䊳 GO TO 2.
No 䊳 GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

1. Disconnect IMMU connector.
2. Check voltage between terminal 8 of IMMU and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEL302W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
NG 䊳 Check the following
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector
Ref. Part No. C1
EL-384
3 CHECK IGN SW. ON SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between terminal 7 of IMMU and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL303W
OK or NG EC
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
NG 䊳 Check the following FE
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector
Ref. part No. C2 AT
4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR IMMU AX

1. Turn ignition OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between IMMU terminal 4 and ground.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL304W
OK or NG
BT
OK 䊳 GO TO 5.
NG 䊳 Repair harness. Ref. part No. C3 HA
SC
IDX
EL-385
5 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect ECM connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 116 and IMMU terminal 1.
SEL305W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 6.
Ref. part No. C4
6 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE BATTERY SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 116 or IMMU terminal 1 and ground.
SEL306W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 7.
NG 䊳 Communication line is short-circuited with battery voltage line or ignition switch ON line.
Repair harness or connectors.
Ref. part No. C4
EL-386
7 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE GROUND SHORT CIRCUIT

2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 116 or IMMU terminal 1 and ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL307W
OK or NG EC
OK 䊳 GO TO 8.
NG 䊳 Communication line is short-circuited with ground line. FE
Repair harness or connectors.
Ref. part No. C4
AT
8 SIGNAL FROM ECM TO IMMU CHECK
1. Check the signal between ECM terminal 116 and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope when ignition switch is AX
turned “ON”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 750 msec. just after ignition switch is
turned “ON”. SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL730W BT
OK or NG
OK 䊳 IMMU is malfunctioning. HA
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”. SC
NG 䊳 ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”.
IDX
EL-387
“DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
SEL293W

Yes 䊳 GO TO 2.
2 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
For initialization and registration of IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/NVIS”.
SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with re-registered IVIS (NATS) ignition key?
Yes 䊳 Ignition key ID was unregistered. Ref. part No. D
No 䊳 IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/NVIS”.
EL-388
“CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS GI
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL294W
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above? FE

Yes 䊳 GO TO 2.
No 䊳 GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1. AT
2 CHECK IVIS (NATS) IGNITION KEY ID CHIP

AX
Start engine with another registered IVIS (NATS) ignition key.
Does the engine start?
SU
Yes 䊳 Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning.
Replace the ignition key.
Ref. part No. E BR
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”.
No 䊳 GO TO 3. ST
3 CHECK IMMU INSTALLATION RS

Check IMMU installation.
Refer to “How to Replace IMMU” in EL-394.
BT
OK or NG
OK 䊳 IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A HA
NG 䊳 Reinstall IMMU correctly.
SC
IDX
EL-389
“ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
SEL298W
NOTE:
“ID DISCORD IMMU-ECM”:
Registered ID of IMMU is in discord with that of ECM.
Yes 䊳 GO TO 2.

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes 䊳 Start engine. (END)
(System initialization had not been completed. Ref. part No. F)
No 䊳 ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. F
EL-390
“SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
1 CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. GI
Is 10A fuse OK?
Yes 䊳 GO TO 2. MA
No 䊳 Replace fuse.
EM
2 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
1. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. LC
3. Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF. EC
4. Check the security indicator lamp lighting.
Security indicator lamp should be blinking.
OK or NG FE
OK 䊳 INSPECTION END
NG 䊳 GO TO 3. AT
3 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT AX

2. Check voltage between security indicator lamp connector terminal 1 and ground.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SEL653WA
OK or NG
BT
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
NG 䊳 Check harness for open or short between fuse and security indicator lamp. HA
4 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP SC

Check security Indicator Lamp.
Is security indicator lamp OK?
Yes 䊳 GO TO 5.
No 䊳 Replace security indicator lamp. IDX
EL-391
5 CHECK IMMU FUNCTION

1. Connect IMMU connector.
3. Check continuity between IMMU terminal 5 and ground.
SEL300W
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and IMMU.
NG 䊳 IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU.
EL-392
“LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS GI
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL295W
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above? FE

Yes 䊳 GO TO 2.
No 䊳 GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1. AT
2 ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE

AX
2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds.
3. Return the key to OFF position. SU
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles).
5. Start the engine.
Does engine start? BR
Yes 䊳 System is OK.
(Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”.) ST
No 䊳 GO TO 3.
RS
3 CHECK IMMU ILLUSTRATION
Check IMMU installation. Refer to “How to Replace IMMU” in EL-394.
BT
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
NG 䊳 Reinstall IMMU correctly.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-393

SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows the above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes 䊳 System is OK.
No 䊳 GO TO DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 to check “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”, refer to
EL-389.
How to Replace IVIS (NATS) IMMU NHEL0178

NOTE:
쐌 If IVIS (NATS) IMMU is not installed correctly, IVIS (NATS)
system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG
RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen will show “LOCK MODE”
or “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”.
SEL096WB
EL-394
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Precautions
Precautions NHEL0295
WARNING:
Do not attempt to disassemble the monitor. Parts of the monitor have high voltages that can result in
severe and dangerous electric shock. GI
CAUTION:
쐌 Do not reverse battery connections.
쐌 Do not attach unauthorized parts. MA
쐌 Protect the unit from severe impact.
NOTE: EM
Before beginning repair, determine whether or not the unit is defective. Refer to “This Condition Is Not
Abnormal” (EL-438).
LC
EC
FE
AT
NHEL0296
OUTLINE NHEL0296S01
The Navigation System (Multi-AV System) relies upon three sens- SU
ing devices in order to determine vehicle location at regular time
intervals.
1. Vehicle speed sensor: Determines the distance the vehicle has BR
traveled.
2. Gyro (Angular velocity sensor): Determines vehicle steering
angle and directional change. ST
3. GPS antenna (GPS data): Determines vehicle forward move-
SEL504X
ment and direction. RS
The data provided by the three sensing functions together with a
comparison of the mapping information read from the CD-ROM
drive permit accurate determination of the vehicle’s current location BT
and subsequent course (map matching). The information appears
on a liquid crystal display.
This comparison of GPS data (vehicle position sensing) and map HA
matching permits precise determination of vehicle location.
SC
Position Sensor Operating Principles NHEL0296S0101

The sensor determines current vehicle location by calculating the
previously sensed position, the distance traveled from this position, IDX
and the directional changes occurring during this travel.
1. Distance traveled
The distance traveled is calculated using signals received from
the vehicle speed sensor. The sensor automatically compen-
sates for the slightly reduced wheel and tire diameter resulting
from tire wear.
2. Forward movement (Direction)
SEL684V Changes in the direction of forward movement are calculated
EL-395
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
by the gyro (angular velocity sensor) and the GPS antenna
(GPS data). Each of these functions has its advantage and
disadvantages. Depending upon conditions, one function takes
precedence over the other to accurately determine the direc-
tion of forward movement.
Function type Advantage Disadvantage
쐌 Calculation errors may

Gyro (Angular 쐌 Able to accurately detect
accumulate over a long
velocity sen- minute changes in steering
period of continuous
sor) angle and direction.
vehicle travel.
쐌 Able to sense vehicle travel

쐌 Unable to detect direction
GPS antenna in four general directions
of vehicle travel at low
(GPS data) (North, South, East, and
vehicle speeds.
West)
Map Matching NHEL0296S0102

Map matching allows the driver to compare the sensed vehicle
location data with the road map contained in the CD-ROM drive.
Vehicle position is marked on the CD-ROM map. This permits the
driver to accurately determine his/her present position on the high-
way and to make appropriate course decisions.
When GPS data reception is poor during travel, the vehicle posi-
tion is not amended. At this time, manual manipulation of the CD-
ROM map position marker is required.
SEL685V
Map matching permits the driver to make priority judgments about

possible appropriate roads other than the one currently being trav-
eled.
If there is an error in the distance or direction of travel, there will
also be an error in the relative position of other routes. When two
routes are closely parallel to one another, the indicated position for
both routes will be nearly the same priority. This is so that, slight
changes in the steering direction may cause the marker to indicate
both routes alternately.
SEL686V
Newly constructed roads may not appear on the CD-ROM map. In

this case, map matching is not possible. Changes in the course of
a road will also prevent accurate map matching.
When driving on a road not shown on the CD-ROM map, the posi-
tion marker used for map matching may indicate a different route.
Even after returning to a route shown on the map, the position
marker may jump to the position currently detected.
SEL687V
EL-396
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GPS (Global Positioning System) NHEL0296S0103
GPS is the global positioning system developed and operated by
the US Department of Defense. GPS satellites (NAVSTAR) trans-
mit radio waves and orbit around the earth at an altitude of approxi-
mately 21,000 km (13,000 miles). GI
GPS receiver calculates the three-dimensional position of the
vehicle (latitude, longitude, and altitude from the sea level) by the
time difference of the radio wave arriving from more than four GPS
MA
satellites (three-dimensional positioning).
When the radio wave is received from only three GPS satellites, the
two-dimensional position (latitude and longitude) is calculated,
EM
SEL526V
using the altitude from the sea level data calculated by using four
GPS satellites (two-dimensional positioning). LC
Positioning capability is degraded in the following cases.
쐌 In two-dimensional positioning, when the vehicle’s altitude EC
from the sea level changes, the precision becomes lower.
쐌 The location detection performance can have an error of about
100 m (300 ft) even in three-dimensional positioning with high FE
precision. Because the precision is influenced by the location
of GPS satellites used for positioning, the location detection
performance may drop depending on the location of GPS sat- AT
ellites.
쐌 When the radio wave from GPS satellites cannot be received,
for example, when the vehicle is in a tunnel, in a parking lot AX
inside building, under an elevated superhighway or near strong
power lines, the location may not be detected. Turbulent/
electric weather conditions may also affect positioning perfor- SU
mance. If something is placed on the antenna, the radio wave
from GPS satellites may not be received.
BR
ST
RS
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NHEL0296S02
NAVI Control Unit NHEL0296S0201
쐌 The gyro (angular speed sensor) and the CD-ROM drive are BT
built-in units that control the navigation functions.
쐌 Signals are received from the gyro, the vehicle speed sensor,
and the GPS antenna. Vehicle location is determined by com- HA
bining this data with the data contained in the CD-ROM map.
Locational information is shown on liquid crystal display panel.
SC
CD-ROM Driver NHEL0296S0202
SEL630X
Maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information
can be easily red from the CD-ROM disc.
IDX
EL-397
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Map CD-ROM NHEL0296S0203
쐌 The map CD-ROM has maps, traffic control regulations, and
other pertinent information.
쐌 To improve CD-ROM map matching and route determination
functions, the CD-ROM uses an exclusive Nissan format.
Therefore, the use of a CD-ROM provided by other manufac-
turers cannot be used.
Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor) NHEL0296S0204

쐌 The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle
steering angle.
쐌 The oscillator gyro periodically senses oscillatory variation at
the oscillation terminals. This variation is caused by changes
in the vehicle angular velocity. Voltage variations are sensed
by ceramic voltage sensors at the left and right sides of the
terminals. Vehicle angular velocity corresponds directly with
these changes in voltage.
쐌 The gyro is built into the navigation (NAVI) control unit.
SEL690V
BIRDVIEW姞 NHEL0296S0205
The BIRDVIEW姞 provides a detailed and easily seen display of
road conditions covering the vehicle’s immediate to distant area.
MAP DISPLAY
BIRDVIEW R
SEL524X
EL-398
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Description NHEL0296S0206
쐌 Display area: Trapezoidal representation showing approximate
distances (Wn, D, and Wd).
쐌 Ten horizontal grid lines indicate display width while six verti- GI
cal grid lines indicate display depth and direction.
쐌 Drawing line area shows open space, depth, and immediate
front area. Each area is to a scale of approximately 5:6:25. MA
쐌 Pushing the “ZOOM IN” button during operation displays the
scale change and the view point height on the left side of the
screen. EM
The height of the view point increases or decreases when
“ZOOM” OR “WIDE” is selected with the joystick.
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL691V
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-399
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MAP DISPLAY =NHEL0296S03
SEL525X
Function of each icon is as follows:

1) Azimuth indication
2) Position marker
The tip of the arrow shows the current position. The shaft of
the arrow indicates the direction in which the vehicle is travel-
ing.
3) GPS reception signal (indicates current reception conditions)
4) Distance display (shows the distance in a reduced scale)
EL-400
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
FUNCTION OF PANEL SWITCH =NHEL0296S04
Display with Pushed “DEST” Switch NHEL0296S0401
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL637X
The function of each icon is as follows: AX

Icon Description
Address Book Favorite areas can be saved to memory. SU

Address/Street The information can be searched from the address.
Point of Interest (POI) The information of favorite areas can be searched. BR

The destination from the intersection name can be
Intersection
retrieved. ST
The previous ten destinations stored in memory are
Previous Dest.
displayed.
RS
City The information can be searched from city name.
Map The information can be searched from the map.

BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-401
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Display with Pushed “ROUTE” Switch =NHEL0296S0402
SEL526X
The function of each icon is as follows:

Icon Description
The selected facility is set as the destination or way-

point.
Quick Stop
(Route guidance has been turned OFF or the destina-
tion has been reached)
Next, current and previous street names can be dis-

Where am I?
played.
The following items can be set

쐌 Complete Route
쐌 Turn List
Route Info.*
쐌 Route Simulation
(Displayed only when the destination area has been
set.)
Based on the selected distance, an alternative route is

searched.
Detour*
[Displayed only when the recommended route (not its
reverse) is followed.]
Change the destination, or add the transit points of the

route set in the route guide. (Displayed only when the
Edit Route*
automatic reroute function has been turned OFF and
the recommended route is not followed.)
Search for a recommended route between the vehi-

cle’s current location and the destination area.
Route Calc.
(Displayed only when the destination area has been
set.)
*: When destinations have been entered, route guidance OFF or destination have
been reached “Route Info.”, “Detour”, “Edit Route” and “Route Clac.” are not
displayed.
EL-402
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Display with Pushed “SETTING” Switch =NHEL0296S0403
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SEL614X
AT
The function of each icon is as follows:
Icon Description AX
The current location can be stored in the Address
Save Current Location
Book. SU
Many adjustments and settings can be made for maxi-
System Setting
mum driving pleasure and convenience.
BR
Edit Address Book The Address Book data can be edited.
The volume and/or on/off of voice prompt can be con-

Guidance Volume
trolled by the joystick. ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-403
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Schematic
Schematic NHEL0297
MEL362O
EL-404
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI —
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — NHEL0298
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL645Q
EL-405
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — (Cont’d)
MEL364O
EL-406
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL365O
EL-407
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MEL098M
EL-408
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL646Q
EL-409
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis Mode
Self-diagnosis Mode NHEL0299

APPLICATION ITEMS NHEL0299S01
Reference
Mode Description
page
Self-diagnosis for Navigation, Display and GPS Antenna

Self Diagnosis EL-411
connection.
Color and gray gradation of display can be checked in

Diagnose the Display EL-419
this mode.
Several input signals to NAVI control unit, can be moni-

Diagnosis for Signals from the Car EL-417
tored in this mode.
Check the map CD- The version (parts number) of inserted CD-ROM can be
EL-418
ROM version checked in this model.
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory

(before turning ignition switch ON) are displayed in this
Error history EL-413
mode. Time and location when/where the errors
occurred are also displayed.
Display the map. Use the joystick to adjust position. Lon-

Confirmation/ Longitude & Latitude EL-420
gitude and latitude will be displayed.
adjustment Navigation
Turning angle of the vehicle on the display can be
Adjust the Angle EL-421
adjusted in this mode.
Under ordinary conditions, the navigation system dis-

tance measuring function will automatically compensate
for minute decreases in wheel and tire diameter caused
Speed Calibration by tire wear or low pressure. Speed calibration immedi- EL-422
ately restores system accuracy in cases such as when
distance calibration is needed because of the use of tire
chains in inclement weather.
This mode is for initializing the current location. Use

Initialize Location when the vehicle is transported a long distance on a EL-423
trailer, etc.
HOW TO PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE NHEL0299S02

2. Push “OPEN/CLOSE” switch and then open the display.
3. Push both of “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for
more than five seconds.
SEL631X
4. Select “Self Diagnosis” or “Confirmation/ adjustment”.

쐌 For further procedure, refer to the following pages which
describe each application item of the self-diagnosis mode.
SEL527X
EL-410
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis Mode (Cont’d)
“Self Diagnosis” NHEL0299S0201
3. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more GI
than 5 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnosis”.
MA
EM
SEL527X
5. Self-diagnosis will be performed. LC
EC
FE
AT
SEL528X
6. Diagnosis results will be displayed. Diagnosis results are indi- AX

cated by display color. For details refer to EL-412, “SELF-DI-
AGNOSIS RESULTS”.
SU
BR
ST
SEL529X
RS
To obtain detailed diagnosis results on the screen, touch “Naviga-
tion” or “Display” or “GPS Antenna”.
BT
HA
SC
SEL530X
IDX
EL-411
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis Mode (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS =NHEL0299S03
Diagnoses/service procedure
Recheck system at each check or
Diagnosed Displayed
Detailed result Description replacement (When malfunction is
item color
eliminated, further repair work is
not required.)
GPS antenna is connected to NAVI

Green — —
control unit correctly.
“GPS
Antenna” 1. Check GPS antenna feeder cable
(GPS Connection to the follow- connection at NAVI control unit.
antenna ing unit is abnormal. See GPS antenna connection error is 2. Visually check GPS antenna
Yellow
connection) the Service Manual for detected. feeder cable. If NG, replace GPS
further diagnosis. antenna assembly.
3. Replace GPS antenna.
Green — No failure is detected. —
Red [*** is abnormal.] NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. Replace NAVI control unit.
Self-diagnosis for CD-

1. Confirm that map CD-ROM is not
ROM DRIVER of NAVI Any CD-ROM is not inserted or
Gray inserted into NAVI control unit.
was not conducted due to NAVI control unit is malfunctioning.
2. Replace NAVI control unit.
no insertion of CD-ROM.
CD-ROM or CD-ROM 1. Confirm the disc is installed cor-

NAVI control unit judges that rectly (not up side down.)
DRIVER of NAVI is
inserted CD-ROM is malfunctioning. 2. Perform “Check the Map
abnormal. See the Ser-
Map CD-ROM or CD-ROM driver of CD-ROM version MODE” in
vice Manual for further
the unit is malfunctioning. EL-418 to confirm whether cor-
“Navigation” diagnosis.
rect CD-ROM is inserted or not.
3. Check the disc surface. Are there
Inserted map CD-ROM can not be any scratches, abrasions or pits
CD-ROM is abnormal. read. on the surface?
Yellow Please check the disc. Map CD-ROM or CD-ROM driver of 4. Replace the CD-ROM.
the unit is malfunctioning. 5. Replace NAVI control unit.
1. Check GPS antenna feeder cable

Connection to the follow- connection at NAVI control unit.
ing unit is abnormal. See GPS antenna connection error is 2. Visually check GPS antenna
the Service Manual for detected. feeder cable. If NG, replace GPS
further diagnosis. antenna assembly.
3. Replace GPS antenna.
NOTE:
Connection between NAVI control unit and display unit should be
normal. Therefore, “Display connection error” will not occur when
the display can be opened or closed properly.
EL-412
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode =NHEL0300

“ERROR HISTORY” MODE NHEL0300S01
In this mode, error history of the system are displayed with the fol- GI
lowing data.
쐌 How many times the error was detected
쐌 The last time data when the error was detected
MA
쐌 The last place where the error was detected
NOTE: EM
쐌 The number of errors can be counted up to 50 times. More
than 51 times will be indicated as 50 times.
쐌 Malfunction of the GPS board (inside the NAVI control LC
unit) will result in the display of incorrect time data.
쐌 When an error occurs, an incorrect position marker
appears on the display. The accuracy of the display data
EC
(position marker) will be affected.
FE
AT
How to Perform AX
NHEL0300S0102
2. Push “OPEN/CLOSE” switch and then open the display. SU
3. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switch at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
4. Select “Confirmation/ adjustment”. BR
ST
SEL527X
RS
5. Select “Navigation”.
BT
HA
SC
SEL531X
6. Select “Error history”.
IDX
SEL532X
EL-413
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
7. If trouble items are displayed with time count, repair/replace
the system according to “ERROR HISTORY” TABLE, EL-415.
SEL533X
8. If necessary, touch error item to display the time when the error
was detected and the place where the error was detected.
SEL534X
9. After repairing the system, erase the diagnosis memory.

NOTE:
When the NAVI control unit must be replaced, do not erase the
diagnosis memory for further inspection of malfunctions.
1) Start the engine.
2) Push both “Map” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
3) Select “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
4) Select “Navigation”.
5) Select “Error history”.
SEL535X
6) Select “Delete”.
7) Select “Yes”.
EL-414
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“ERROR HISTORY” TABLE =NHEL0300S02
Refer-
Detected items Description Diagnosis/service procedure ence
page GI
Perform self-diagnosis to confirm
whether the NAVI control unit is mal-
functioning or not. If no failure is MA
Communications malfunction between
Gyro sensor disconnected detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-410
NAVI control unit and internal gyro
rary malfunction may have been caused
by strong electromagnetic wave interfer- EM
ence.
Check vehicle speed sensor signal in LC

“Diagnosis for signals from the car”
Connection problem of speed Input malfunction of NAVI control unit mode. If the input signal is not detected
EL-417
sensor and speed sensor correctly, check harness for open or
short between combination meter and EC
NAVI control unit.
GPS disconnected Perform self-diagnosis to confirm FE

functioning or not. If no failure is
GPS transmission cable malfunc- Communications malfunction between
detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-410 AT
tion NAVI control unit and GPS board
by strong electromagnetic wave interfer-
GPS input line connection error ence.
AX
The transmission circuit of the GPS A location error occurs. Strong electro-
GPS TCXO over
board frequency synchronization oscilla- magnetic wave interference may have
tor (inside the NAVI control unit) is send- occurred. The GPS antenna may be in a — SU
ing an oscillation frequency that is very hot or very cold environment. This
GPS TCXO under
greater or less than the set value. is usually a temporary malfunction.
Perform self-diagnosis to confirm BR

GPS ROM malfunction
Internal malfunction of GPS board RAM whether the NAVI control unit is mal-
or ROM inside the NAVI control unit. functioning or not. If no failure is
GPS RAM malfunction ST
detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-410
Malfunction of GPS board clock IC by strong electromagnetic wave interfer-
GPS RTC malfunction
inside the NAVI control unit. ence. RS
Perform self-diagnosis to confirm GPS
antenna connection. If no failure is
GPS antenna disconnected — detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-410 BT
by a strong impact.
HA
1. Check power supply circuits for NAVI
EL-435
control unit.
2. Perform self-diagnosis to confirm SC

EL-410
Power supply voltage for GPS board GPS antenna connection.
Low voltage of GPS
inside the NAVI control unit is low.
3. If above diagnosis results are OK, a
momentary and/or temporary malfunc-
—
tion may have been caused by a strong
impact.
IDX
functioning or not. If no failure is
CD-ROM driver malfunction (inside the
CD-ROM communication error detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-410
NAVI control unit)
by strong electromagnetic wave interfer-
ence.
EL-415
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Refer-
Detected items Description Diagnosis/service procedure ence
page
Check that whether the disc can be

inserted and ejected correctly. If the
Loading mechanism malfunction — —
loading function does not operate
correctly, replace NAVI control unit.
It is confirmed that the appropriate CD-

CD-ROM reading error ROM disc is positioned in the CD-ROM Perform self-diagnosis to confirm
loader. However, no data can be read. whether the inserted disc is malfunction- EL-410
Malfunctioning of error correction Erroneous data is read from the CD- ing or not.
for CD-ROM ROM. The errors cannot be corrected.
CD-ROM data reading beam is out of Rough road driving might create CD
CD-ROM focus error —
focus. skipping like music CD audio unit.

CD-ROM malfunction — whether the inserted disc is malfunction- EL-410
ing or not.
EL-416
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“DIAGNOSIS FOR SIGNALS FROM THE CAR” MODE
=NHEL0300S03
In “Diagnosis for Signals from the Car” mode, following input sig-
nals to the NAVI control unit can be checked on the display. GI
Item Indication Vehicle condition
ON Vehicle speed is greater than 0 km/h (0 MPH). MA

Vehicle Speed*
OFF Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH).
ON Lighting switch is in 1st or 2nd position. EM

Light
OFF Lighting switch is in “OFF” position.
ON Ignition switch is in “ON” position. LC

IGN
OFF Ignition switch is in “ACC” position.
ON Selector/shift lever is in “Reverse” position.

EC
Reverse* Selector/shift lever is in other than “Reverse”
OFF
position. FE
*: When ignition switch is in “ACC” position, indication will be changed to “-”.
AT
How to Perform AX
NHEL0300S0302
3. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
4. Select “Confirmation/ adjustment”. BR
ST
SEL527X
RS
5. Select “Diagnosis for Signals from the Car”.
BT
HA
SC
SEL531X
6. Then “Diagnosis for Signals from the Car” mode is performed.
IDX
SEL542X
EL-417
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“CHECK THE MAP CD-ROM VERSION” MODE =NHEL0300S04
How to Perform NHEL0300S0401
than 5 seconds.
4. Select “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
SEL527X
SEL531X
6. Select “Check the map CD-ROM version”.
SEL532X
7. The version (parts number) of CD-ROM loaded to the NAVI

control unit will be displayed.
SEL536X
EL-418
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“DIAGNOSE THE DISPLAY” MODE =NHEL0300S05
Use the “Diagnose the Display” mode to check the display color
brightness and shading. The NAVI control unit must be replaced if GI
the color brightness and shading are abnormal.
MA
EM
How to Perform NHEL0300S0502 LC

3. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more EC
than 5 seconds.
FE
AT
SEL527X
5. Select “Diagnose the Display”. AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL531X
RS
6. Select “Display Color Spectrum Bar” or “Display Gradation
Bar”.
7. Then color bar/gray scale will be displayed. BT
HA
SC
SEL540X
IDX
SEL541X
EL-419
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“LONGITUDE & LATITUDE” MODE NHEL0300S06
The “Longitude & Latitude” is used to confirm the longitude and
latitude of some optional area point.

than 5 seconds.
SEL527X
SEL531X
6. Select “Longitude & Latitude”.
SEL532X
7. Adjust the pointer with using the joystick and touch “Set”.
8. The longitude and latitude are displayed.
SEL537X
EL-420
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“ADJUST THE ANGLE” MODE NHEL0300S07
If the display indicates a larger or smaller turning angle than the
actual turning angle, the gyro (angular speed sensor) sensing val- GI
ues must be checked.
In case that the vehicle on the display makes larger angle turn than
reality, touch “−”. In case that the vehicle on the display makes MA
smaller angle turn than reality, touch “+”.
EM
How to Perform NHEL0300S0702 LC

3. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more EC
than 5 seconds.
FE
AT
SEL527X
5. Select “Navigation”. AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL531X
RS
6. Select “Adjust the angle”.
BT
HA
SC
SEL532X
7. Select “Left Turn” to adjust the angle to the left. Touch “Right
Turn” to adjust the angle to the right.
8. Select “+” to increase the angle change coefficient or “−” to IDX
reduce the angle change coefficient.
9. Select “Set” to save the changed values in memory.
10. Then the vehicle turning angle on the display has adjusted.
SEL538X
EL-421
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“SPEED CALIBRATION” MODE NHEL0300S08
than 5 seconds.
SEL527X
SEL531X
6. Select “Speed Calibration”.
SEL532X
7. Select “+” or “−” to adjust the distance change coefficient.

쐌 To make the distance change coefficient smaller, touch “−”.
쐌 To make the distance change coefficient larger, touch “+”.
8. Select “Set”.
SEL539X
EL-422
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“INITIALIZE LOCATION” MODE =NHEL0300S09
This procedure is for initializing the current location. Perform “Ini-
tialize Location” when the vehicle is transported a long distance on
a trailer, etc.
Map with grey background appears and the vehicle location can GI
not be adjusted by scrolling the display when the vehicle location
in the memory is out of the area of the inserted map data. Perform
“Initialize Location” when this occurs.
MA
NOTE:
쐌 Only initialize the system when the NAVI control unit is EM
replaced. If the system is initialized in other cases, it may
cause inaccurate positioning of the position marker for a
while. LC
쐌 Initialize the system outside for receiving the radio wave
from the GPS satellite.
EC
1. Switch the navigation system mode to self-diagnosis by push-
ing both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more FE
than 5 seconds.
AT
2. Select “Confirmation/ adjustment”. AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL527X
RS
3. Select “Initialize Location”. Then the previous screen is dis-
played.
BT
HA
SC
SEL531X
4. Push “MAP” switch, and then push “SETTING” switch.

5. Select “System Setting”.
IDX
SEL632X
EL-423
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
6. Select “GPS Information”.
SEL559X
7. More than one GPS satellite icon turns green. (It may take 1
to 15 minutes.)
NOTE:
Drive the vehicle for a while* in order to change the receiving
condition of the radio wave from the GPS satellite if the GPS
icon does not turn green.
* The driving distance which is necessary depends on the
receiving condition of the radio wave from the GPS satellite.
SEL146W
8. Push “MAP” switch and check the following.

쐌 Confirm that the GPS icon on the map turns green.
쐌 Then the position marker should show the current location.
쐌 Position marker rotates corresponding to the movement of the
vehicle.
9. Initialization is completed.
EL-424
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Control Panel Mode
Control Panel Mode =NHEL0301

APPLICATION ITEMS NHEL0301S01
Mode Description Reference page

GI
Display can be set to open by either of the following controls.
쐌 Display will be opened when OPEN/CLOSE SW is selected with Key SW positioned
Display Auto Open EL-425
ACC. MA
쐌 Display will be automatically opened when Key SW is turned from OFF to ACC.
The GPS data includes longitude, latitude and altitude (distance above sea level) of the
present vehicle position, and current date and time for the area in which the vehicle is EM
GPS Information EL-426
being driven.
Also indicated are the GPS reception conditions and the GPS satellite position.
LC
Quick Stop Customer
One facility of your selection can be added to your Quick Stop. EL-426
Setting
Route Priorities Priorities of search request and automatic re-searching can be set for route search. EL-427 EC
Tracking Tracking to the present vehicle position can be displayed. EL-427
The following display settings can be customized.

FE
Display Setting 쐌 Display color (Day mode or Night mode) EL-428
쐌 Brightness of display
AT
Heading of the map display can be customized for either north heading or the actual
Heading EL-428
driving direction of the vehicle.
Icons of facilities can be displayed.

AX
Nearby Display Icons EL-429
Facilities to be displayed can be selected from the variety selections.
Adjust Current Loca-

Current location of position marker can be adjusted. Direction of position marker also SU
can be calibrated when heading direction of the vehicle on the display is not matched EL-429
tion
with the actual direction.
Avoid Area Setting Particular area can be avoided when routing. — BR

Beep On/Off Beep sounds which corresponds to the system operation can be activated/deactivated. EL-430
Clear Memory Address book, Previous destination or Avoid area can be deleted. EL-430
ST
RS
HOW TO PERFORM CONTROL PANEL MODE NHEL0301S02
2. Push “OPEN/CLOSE” switch and then open the display. BT
3. Push “SETTING” switch.
쐌 For further procedures, refer to the following pages which
describe each application item of the control panel mode.
HA
SC
SEL633X
“DISPLAY AUTO OPEN” MODE NHEL0301S03

IDX
SEL619X
EL-425
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Control Panel Mode (Cont’d)
5. Select “Display Auto Open”.
SEL638X
6. Select “Auto” or “Manual” icon.

쐌 To manually open the display, select “Manual”.
쐌 To automatically open the display, select “Auto”.
7. Push “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the current
location map.
SEL621X
“GPS INFORMATION” MODE NHEL0301S04

5. Select “GPS information”.
SEL639X
6. Then GPS information will be displayed.
SEL146W
“QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE NHEL0301S05

5. Select “Quick Stop Customer Setting”.
SEL640X
EL-426
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
6. Select an item from the list.
GI
MA
EM
SEL544X
“ROUTE PRIORITIES” MODE NHEL0301S06 LC

3. Push “SETTING” switch. EC
5. Select “Route Priorities”. FE
AT
SEL545X
6. Select an item from the list. AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL546X
RS
“TRACKING” MODE NHEL0301S07
HA
5. Select “Tracking”.
SC
SEL547X
6. Select “On” or “Off” icon.

쐌 To leave no trail on the map, select “Off”.
쐌 To leave a trail in the map, select “On”.
IDX
location map.
NOTE:
When a trail display is turned OFF, trail data is erased from the
memory.
SEL548X
EL-427
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“DISPLAY SETTING” MODE NHEL0301S08
Display Color Setting NHEL0301S0801
5. Select “Color”. Display color will change to Day mode/Night
mode.
6. Select “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the cur-
rent location map.
SEL560X
NOTE:
쐌 Display color can be changed independently when light-
ing switch is turned on and off.
쐌 Initial setting of the color is as follows:
When lighting switch is turned off: Day mode
When lighting switch is turned on: Night mode
SEL561X
Brightness Setting NHEL0301S0802

5. Select “Bright” or “Dark” to adjust the brightness of display.
6. Select “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the cur-
rent location map.
NOTE:
SEL562X
Display brightness can be adjusted independently when light-
ing switch is turned on and off.
“HEADING” MODE NHEL0301S09

5. Select “Heading”.
SEL549X
EL-428
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
6. Select “Heading up” or “North up” icon.
쐌 To display North up, select “North up”.
쐌 To display the car heading up, select “Heading up”.
7. Push “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the current GI
location map.
MA
EM
SEL550X
“NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE NHEL0301S10 LC

5. Select “Nearby Display Icons”. FE
AT
SEL551X
6. Select and touch an item on the list. AX

location map.
SU
BR
ST
SEL552X
RS
“ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE NHEL0301S11
HA
5. Select “Adjust Current Location”.
SC
SEL553X
6. Select “ ” or “ ” to calibrate the heading direction. (Arrow

marks will rotate corresponding to the calibration key.)
7. Select “Set”. Then the vehicle mark will be matched to the IDX
arrow mark.
8. Display will show “Heading direction has been calibrated” and
then go back to the current location map.
SEL554X
EL-429
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“BEEP ON/OFF” MODE NHEL0301S12
2. Push “OPEN/CLOSE” switch and then open display.
5. Touch “Beep On/Off”.
SEL555X
6. Select “On” or “Off” icon.

쐌 If you want the beep sound, select “On”.
쐌 If you do not want the beep sound, select “Off”.
7. Push “PREVIOUS” switch, then the display will go back to the
current location map.
SEL556X
“CLEAR MEMORY” MODE NHEL0301S13

5. Select “Clear Memory”.
SEL641X
6. To delete all the stored places in “Address Book”, “Avoid Area”

and “Previous Dest”, select “Yes”.
SEL558X
EL-430
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Guide Volume Setting
Guide Volume Setting =NHEL0302

DESCRIPTION NHEL0302S01
Following voice guidance setting can be changed.
쐌 Voice guidance activation/deactivation GI
쐌 Voice volume of the guidance
MA
EM
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION SETTING NHEL0302S02 LC

4. The voice prompt can be turned on/off by pressing the “Guid-
ance Volume” button.
FE
AT
SEL563X
VOICE VOLUME SETTING AX

NHEL0302S03
4. Volume of the voice can be controlled by bending the joystick
to left/right. BR
ST
SEL563X
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-431
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses

Reference
Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure
page
Any function of the system

Check power supply and ground circuit for NAVI control unit. EL-435
does not operate.
Strange screen color or 1. Check “DISPLAY SETTING” MODE. EL-428

unusual screen brightness. 2. Check display in “DIAGNOSE THE DISPLAY” MODE. EL-419
The display is not dimmed 1. Check “DISPLAY SETTING” MODE. EL-428

when turning lighting switch 2. Check lighting switch signal input to NAVI control unit correctly in “DIAGNOSIS
to ON. EL-417
FOR THE SIGNALS FROM THE CAR” MODE.
No navigation guide voice 1. Check “Guide Volume Setting”. EL-431

are heard from both front
speakers. 2. Check voice guide operation. EL-436
Beep does not sound when

Check “BEEP ON/OFF” MODE. EL-430
the system guides route.
Position marker does not

trace along the route being Go to “WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION”. EL-433
traveled.
Position marker does not

Check reverse signal input to NAVI control unit correctly by “DIAGNOSIS FOR
indicate forward or backward EL-417
THE SIGNALS FROM THE CAR” MODE.
movement.
1. Is there anything obstructing the GPS antenna on the rear parcel finisher?
Radio wave of GPS cannot —
(GPS antenna located under the rear parcel finisher.)
be received. (GPS marker
on the display does not 2. Check GPS radio wave receive condition in “GPS INFORMATION MODE”. EL-426
become green color.)
3. Check GPS antenna in “Self Diagnosis”. EL-411
Heading direction of position 1. Perform “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE. EL-429

marker does not match
vehicle direction. 2. Go to “WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION”. EL-433
Stored location in the

address book and other Stored location in the address book and other memory functions may be lost if the
memory functions are lost battery is disconnected or becomes discharged. If this should occur, charge or —
when battery is disconnected replace the battery as necessary and re-enter the information.
or becomes discharged.
Map appears grey and can- The current location in the memory is out of the map data area.
EL-423
not be scrolled Perform “INITIALIZE LOCATION” MODE.
EL-432
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION NHEL0303S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEL519X
*1: EL-438 *4: EL-417 *6: EL-412

HA
*2: EL-410 *5: EL-434 *7: EL-415
*3: EL-413
SC
IDX
EL-433
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
DRIVING TEST =NHEL0303S03
During the driving test, diagnose the system by checking the dif-
ference of symptoms with each sensor ON or OFF.
Test Pattern 1 NHEL0303S0301
Test method in which current position adjustment is not made
according to GPS data.
쐌 Remove the GPS antenna connector from the NAVI control
unit. Drive the vehicle.
Before driving the vehicle, perform “Adjust Current Location”
MODE (EL-429).
Test Pattern 2 NHEL0303S0302
Test procedure in which map matching is not used.
쐌 Before driving the vehicle, perform “Adjust Current Location”
MODE (EL-429). With the ignition switch OFF and the map
CD-ROM removed from the NAVI control unit, drive the
vehicle. After driving the vehicle, reinstall the map CD-ROM.
Compare the saved driving tracks for the vehicle’s current loca-
tion with roads on the map.
Example NHEL0303S0303
<The position marker consistently indicates the wrong position
when driving in the same area. Determine if this is the result of the
map matching function or the GPS function.>
, Perform test pattern 1.
<To verify the accuracy of the road configuration shown on the
display>
, Perform test patterns 1 and 2.
쐌 Compare the map and the saved driving tracks. The precision
of the saved driving tracks is within several hundred meters.
<To make distance calibration and adjustments>
, Perform test patterns 1 and 2.
쐌 Make adjustments by driving the vehicle over a known course
(highway or other road where distances are clearly marked).
Calibrate the distance against the known distance. Use the
formula below.
Calibration value = Screen display distance/Actual distance
EL-434
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK FOR
NAVI CONTROL UNIT =NHEL0303S04
Terminal Ignition switch

GI
(+) (−) OFF ACC ON
1 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage

MA
2 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage
EM
5 Ground 0V 0V Battery voltage
SEL654X
6 Ground 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage
LC
EC
쐌 Harness for open or short between fuse and NAVI control unit FE
AT

NHEL0303S0402
SU
3 - Ground Yes
4 - Ground Yes
BR
ST
SEL694VB
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-435
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
VOICE GUIDE OPERATION CHECK =NHEL0303S05
1 PRELIMINARY CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC position.
2. Insert the music CD into the radio and CD player.
3. Try to play the music CD.
Is the sound emitted from all speakers?
Yes or No
Yes 䊳 GO TO 2.
No 䊳 Repair or replace audio system. Refer to “AUDIO” in EL section of Service Manual.
2 CHECK NAVI OPERATION ON SIGNAL

1. Disconnect audio unit connector.
2. Push “VOICE” button.
3. Check voltage between audio unit terminal 28 and ground.
SEL645XC
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
NG 䊳 Repair or replace harness or NAVI control unit.
3 CHECK VOICE SIGNAL

1. Push “VOICE” button.
2. Check voltage between NAVI control unit terminal 42 or 43 and ground.
SEL832Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
NG 䊳 Repairor replace NAVI control unit.
EL-436
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4 CHECK VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and AUDIO unit connector.
3. Check continuity between NAVI control unit terminal 42 and AUDIO unit terminal 36. GI
4. Check continuity between NAVI control unit terminal 43 and AUDIO unit terminal 34.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SEL833Y
Yes or No
FE
Yes 䊳 Repair or replace audio unit. Refer to “AUDIO” in EL section of Service Manual.
No 䊳 Repair or replace harness or connector.
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-437
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition Is Not Abnormal
This Condition Is Not Abnormal =NHEL0304

EXAMPLE OF BASIC OPERATIONAL ERRORS NHEL0304S01
No image is dis-
Monitor brightness control is set to full dark. Readjust monitor brightness.
played.
Map does not appear Map CD is not inserted or inserted upside down. Insert the map CD with the label facing up.
on display. Map mode is turned OFF. Press the “MAP” button.
No guide tone is
heard. Voice guide adjustment OFF/Volume is set to the
Adjust the voice guide level.
Voice guide volume is lowest or highest level.
too high or too low.
Dark display/Slow Wait until vehicle interior temperature rises to appro-

Low vehicle interior temperature
image movement priate level.
Small black or white

dots appear on the Unique liquid crystal display phenomena No problem
screen.
“Unable to read CD” Check map CD surface. If dirty, wipe clean with a
message appears Map CD surface is tainted/CD surface is partially soft cloth.
only during specified scratched.
operation. If map CD surface is damaged, replace the CD.
Area place names are not displayed.

If area place names do not appear on the map display, these names may not be available. Use the BIRD-
VIEW姞 flat surface map display function. Display output may differ. Note the items related to BIRDVIEW姞
below.
쐌 Priority is given to the display of place names in the direction of vehicle travel.
쐌 Extended display of vehicle travel distance for both surfaces and steering angle (flat directional changes).
This phenomenon disappears after the display image has been replaced by another one.
쐌 The names of route and area might vary between the immediate front area and distance front area.
쐌 Alphanumeric display characters are limited to maintain display simplicity and clarity. Display details may
differ with time and place.
쐌 Identical place and road names may appear on the display at more than one location.
EL-438
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition Is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
EXAMPLE OF CURRENT VEHICLE POSITION MARKER ERROR =NHEL0304S02
The navigation system reads the vehicle distance and steering angle data. Because the vehicle is moving,
there will be an error in the current position indication. After the error appears, drive the vehicle for a short
distance. Stop the vehicle. If the position marker does not return to its original position, perform “Adjust Cur-
rent Location” MODE (EL-429). GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL698V ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-439
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Possible cause Drive condition Service procedure
On wet, icy, or gravel road where

frequent wheel slippage occurs, dis-
tance calculations may be errone-
Slippery road surface
ous. The position marker may show
the vehicle to be in inaccurate posi-
tion.
Area Hilly areas where the road has
banked curves. When the vehicle
enters these banked curves, there
Slanted area may be an error in steering angle
measurement. The position marker
may show the vehicle to be in inac-
curate position.
Map display for a given road does not appear. When the vehicle is driven on a If the position marker does
newly constructed road that does not move to the correct posi-
not appear on the existing map. Map tion even after the vehicle
marking and calibration are not pos- has been driven approxi-
sible. The position marker may indi- mately 10 km (6 miles), per-
cate inaccurate position in close form “Adjust Current Loca-
proximity to the actual position. tion” MODE (EL-429). If
Subsequently, when the vehicle is necessary, perform “Speed
SEL699V driven on a road which is available
Calibration” (EL-422).
as map data, the position marker
may still indicate an inaccurate posi-
Map tion.
data
The vehicle is driven on a road whose course has
been altered (usually to improve the road or to When the map data shown on the
eliminate some hazard). display and the actual conditions are
different. Map matching will not be
possible. The position marker may
indicate inaccurate position in close
proximity to the actual position. If the
vehicle is driven on the indicated
road, further errors may occur.
SEL700V
If the position marker does

not move to the correct posi-
tion even after the vehicle
Tire chains will affect distance sens- has been driven approxi-
Vehicle Use of tire chains (Stormy weather) ing. The position marker may indi- mately 10 km (6 miles), per-
cate inaccurate position. form “Speed Calibration” (EL-
422). After removing the tire
chains, sensing accuracy
may recover by itself.
EL-440
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Possible cause Drive condition Service procedure
The gyro (angular velocity sensor)

needs about 15 seconds after the
engine is started to precisely sense
Wait a few moments
GI
the angular velocity.
between starting the engine
Driving immediately after starting engine. Directional sensing errors will occur
and actually driving the
if the vehicle is moved immediately
vehicle. MA
after starting the engine. The posi-
tion marker may indicate inaccurate
position. EM
When the vehicle is driven continu-
Opera-
ously without stopping over a long
tion Stop the vehicle. Perform LC
Continuous driving for long distances (non-stop) distance, errors in directional sens-
“Speed Calibration” (EL-422).
ing may occur. The position marker
may indicate inaccurate position.
If the position marker does

EC
Wheel spinning (peeling out) or simi- not move to the correct posi-
lar rough driving techniques can tion even after the vehicle
Rough or violent driving adversely affect sensing accuracy. has been driven approxi- FE
The position marker may indicate mately 10 km (6 miles), per-
inaccurate position. form “Adjust Current Loca-
tion” MODE (EL-429). AT
Positional calibration precision Perform “Adjust Current
If current vehicle location is roughly Location” MODE (EL-429) AX
set, the system may be unable to within a precision standard of
locate the road that the vehicle is 1 mm (0.04 in) on the dis-
traveling on. (This is especially true play. SU
in an area where there are many NOTE:
Posi- roads.) During calibration, use the
tional most detailed map possible.
calibra-
SEL701V BR
tion Position calibration direction
proce-
dures When calibrating the position, check ST
the vehicle direction. If the vehicle Perform “Adjust Current
direction is not correct, subsequent Location” MODE, refer to
precision of current location will be EL-429. RS
affected.
SEL702V BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-441
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Possible cause:
Drive condition Service procedure
—: Vehicle running ---: Indication
Y-intersection
In Y-intersections with a very gradual

change in course, a directional sens-
ing may be inaccurate. This may
result in the position marker giving
the wrong road indication.
SEL703V
Spiral road
On loop bridges and similar struc-

tures which result in a large and
continuous turn, turning angle may
be sensed inaccurately. As a result,
the position marker may separate
from the route on the map.
SEL704V
Straight road
In long distance driving on a straight
road or road with very gradual
curves, map marking inaccuracies
may occur. In such cases, the posi-
tion marker may stray from the route
being traveled during subsequent If the position marker does
turns due to inaccurate distance cal- not move to the correct posi-
culation. tion even after the vehicle
SEL705V has been driven approxi-
Road
mately 10 km (6 miles), per-
shapes Winding road
form “Store place”. If
Directional sensing precision errors required, also perform
may occur when traveling on wind- “Adjust Current Location”
ing roads. During map matching, the MODE (EL-429).
position marker may stray to an
adjacent road having a similar
shape. Subsequent position marker
error may occur.
SEL706V
Grid-like road shape Directional sensing and distance

sensing, precision errors may occur
because of many roads having a
similar shape in the immediate area.
During map matching, the position
marker may stray to an adjacent
road having a similar shape. Subse-
quent position marker error may
SEL707V occur.
Parallel roads
When driving on a parallel road,

map matching errors may occur.
Subsequent position marker error
may also occur.
SEL708V
EL-442
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Possible cause:
Drive condition Service procedure
—: Vehicle running ---: Indication
Parking lot or similar area When the vehicle is driven in a park-

ing lot or similar area, such as in an GI
area not normally marked as a road
on map, during map matching, the
system may select nearby roads. MA
This error may continue after the
vehicle exits the parking area and
begins to run on ordinary roads. EM
Vehicle operation in a parking area If the position marker does
SEL709V not move to the correct posi-
may involve frequent turns and up
and/or down operation. Directional tion even after the vehicle
Loca- sensing errors may occur leading to has been driven approxi- LC
subsequent route and position mis- mately 10 km (6 miles), per-
tion
takes. form “Store place”. If
required, also perform EC
Turntable When the ignition switch is OFF (the “Adjust Current Location”
usual situation when the vehicle is MODE (EL-429).
on a turntable), the navigation sys- FE
tem receives no data from the gyro
(angular velocity sensor). When the
turntable rotates, no directional AT
change is sensed. During subse-
quent vehicle operation, directional
SEL710V and route errors may occur. AX
Position marker displays a completely different location
In circumstances such as those described below, GPS signal reception conditions may result in an erroneous SU
position of the position marker. Perform “Adjust Current Location” MODE (EL-429).
NOTE:
쐌 When GPS satellite signal reception conditions are poor, the position of position marker may be errone- BR
ous. If correction is not made immediately, the position marker error will be compounded and a completely
different location will be indicated. In an area where GPS satellite signal reception conditions are good,
the system can be returned to normal operation. ST
쐌 The vehicle is driven aboard a car ferry or is towed for some distance with the ignition switch OFF. Vehicle
movement is not sensed. Current location calculations do not occur and current location data does not
appear on the display screen. Use GPS to accurately determine actual vehicle position. The system can
RS
be returned to normal operation when the GPS satellite signal reception conditions are good.
Position marker jumps BT
In circumstances such as those described below, the position marker may jump as a result of automatic cur-
rent location corrections made by the system.
During map matching HA
쐌 During map matching, the position marker may jump from one spot to another. In this case, it may be cor-
rected to a wrong road or to an area where no road exist.
GPS location correcting SC
쐌 Vehicle current location is sensed using the GPS data. Positional calibration is performed. The position
marker continues to be in the wrong position. It may jump about from one area of the screen to another.
In this case, it may be corrected to a wrong road or to an area where no road exist.
Position marker indicates that the vehicle is in the middle of an ocean or large river
The navigation system does not distinguish between land and water surfaces. In some cases, a position IDX
marker error may cause the display to show the vehicle above a water surface.
Position of position marker varies when the vehicle is repeatedly operated on the same road
Driving lane and steering wheel movement results in a variety of different positions of the position mark when
traveling on the same road based on sensing results by the GPS antenna and gyro (angular velocity sensor).
Slow locational correction using map matching
쐌 The map matching function requires verification of local data. To make the map matching function, some
distance needs to be driven.
쐌 The map matching function may not provide accurate performance in an area where there are numerous
parallel roads. Until the system judges the road characteristics, an incorrect position may be shown.
EL-443
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GPS signal reception conditions are good. However, the position mark does not return to its proper
position.
쐌 The system senses the vehicle location with an error of approximately 100 m (328 ft). Due to the limita-
tion of precision, the position marker may be inaccurate even if the GPS signal reception condition is good.
쐌 The navigation system uses GPS data to determine vehicle location. GPS data is compared with other
locational sensing data during the map matching process. The system decides which data is more pre-
cise and uses that data.
쐌 When the vehicle is stationary, GPS data cannot be used to make system corrections.
Area designations on the map display and the BIRDVIEW姞 display differ.
To prevent the display from becoming congested, alphanumeric information is abridged.
[No problem]
Correct position of your vehicle is not displayed.
Vehicle position changed after ignition key was turned to the OFF position (Vehicle is transported on car ferry,
car train, or by some other means).
[Operate vehicle for short time under GPS receiving conditions.]
The display does not change to night-time mode even though the light switch has been turned ON.
Lights have been turned on. In “DISPLAY CHANGE” mode, night-time mode on display has been switched to
day-time mode and still is.
[Turn lights on again. Set the display to night-time mode. Refer to EL-428.]
Map does not scroll even though the position of your vehicle is changed.
Present area does not appear on the display.
[Press the “MAP” switch.]
Vehicle position marker does not appear.
Present area does not appear on the display.
[Press the “MAP” switch.]
The map surface precision display (GPS satellite marker) still remains gray.
Vehicle is parked inside a building or in the shadow of a large building. This intercepts the GPS signal.
[Move the vehicle to a more open position.]
GPS signal is not received because objects are placed on the rear parcel shelf.
[Remove objects from the rear parcel shelf.]
GPS satellite position is bad.
[Wait until GPS satellite position improves.]
Vehicle position precision is bad.
The map surface precision display (GPS satellite marker) still remains gray.
[Refer to “The map surface precision display (GPS satellite marker) still remains gray” item (Symptoms)]
Vehicle speed and elapsed distance is calculated from the vehicle speed pulse. This pulse is dependent upon
tire size. If tire chains are used on the vehicle, accuracy will be affected (pulse rate will be too fast or too slow).
The same is true if the system installed to your vehicle is removed and installed on another vehicle.
[Drive the vehicle at a speed higher than 30 km/h (19 MPH) for approximately 30 minutes. Automatic read-
justment should occur. If it does not (remains too fast or too slow), distance calibration is required. Or, drive
the vehicle for a short distance. Perform “SPEED CALIBRATION” (EL-422). After removing the tire chains,
sensing accuracy may recover by itself.]
Bad map data or system defect (same error consistently occurs in the same area)
ROUTE SEARCH/ROUTE GUIDE NHEL0304S03
쐌 If the present location or the destination location is displayed in the avoid area, it is not possible to search
routes.
쐌 If the avoid area is set to wide range area, it may not be possible to find appropriate routes or search for
alternate routes.
쐌 The automatic re-route calculates a return to the original route. Because of this, it may not be possible to
search appropriate new routes. If you deviate from the original route and wish to select an appropriate new
route, touch “Route Calculation”.
쐌 The automatic re-route function may sometimes require considerable time.
쐌 Displayed route number and directional information at a highway junction may differ from the information
posted on the actual road signs.
쐌 Displayed street name information at a highway exit may differ from the information posted on the actual
road signs.
쐌 Street name information displayed on the enlarged intersection map may differ from the information posted
on the actual road signs.
EL-444
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
쐌 The enlarged intersection map may display an “Unknown Street” message at some street intersections.
쐌 Because of road configuration, etc. the guide may finish early. If this occurs, follow the marker to reach
your destination.
쐌 Destination area side information (left side and right side) may differ from actual conditions because of
data error.
GI
Unable to Set Destination, Way Point, and/or menu items NHEL0304S0301
MA
Unable to search way points in A way point already crossed or determined to If you desire to pass through a way point for a
re-search mode have been crossed. second time, reperform route edit.
EM
Set designation areas and perform route
Route search does not occur.
search. LC
Car marker does not appear on recom-
Turn list is not displayed. Drive on the recommended route.
mended route.
EC
Turn the route guide ON. (Push “VOICE”
Route guide is canceled.
switch.)
FE
Drive the vehicle on the search object route
Automatic search does not func- Vehicle is not running on search object route
or perform a manual route search. Note that
tion. (road indicated by orange, brown or red line).
all routes will be re-searched at this time.
AT
Use the “RE-ROUTE” mode to search again
Unable to select detour route. Vehicle is not running on recommended route.
or return to the recommended route.
Detour route search results are All possible conditions were considered, but
AX
This is not abnormal.
identical to previous search. results are the same.
More than five way points have been previ-

More than five way points cannot be specified SU
Unable to set a way point. at the same time. Break down into smaller
ously set (and not cleared).
segments and perform search.
Unable to select starting point Starting point will normally be your present
BR
during route edit. location during route edit.
Cannot select certain menu items. While vehicle is running.

Park the vehicle in a safe area and perform ST
operation.
Voice Guide Information NHEL0304S0302

RS
Voice guide is only available at certain inter-

BT
sections (marked with ). In some cases, the
guide is not available even when the vehicle
makes a turn. HA
Voice guide does not function. Return to recommended route or reperform
Vehicle is not running on recommended route.
route search. SC
Voice guide is OFF. Set voice guide to the ON position.
Turn the route guide ON. (Push “VOICE”

Route guide is canceled.
switch.)
The guide content does not corre- The content of the voice guide may vary Operate vehicle following the traffic rules and
spond to actual conditions. depending on the type of junction. regulation. IDX
Route Search Information NHEL0304S0303
Proceeding in desired direction.

Unable to find appropriate route in the desired
However, route search in desired This is not abnormal.
direction.
direction does not function.
EL-445
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Adjust position to wide road (brown) near des-

tination area. In an area where traffic direction
No object route is searched near destination
is displayed separately, pay close attention to
area.
No route is displayed. the direction of travel. Set the destination area
and the way point over the road.
Starting point and destination areas are very Move destination areas away from starting
near. point on the screen.
The recommended route is divided into indi-

Recommended route which has
vidual control segments. When way point 1 is
been passed disappears from the This is not abnormal.
passed, the data from the starting point to the
display.
way point 1 is erased.
There may be special conditions for roads

Search recommends roundabout near the starting point and destination area Slightly change starting point and destination
route. (one-way traffic, etc.). A roundabout route may area settings.
be displayed.
Landmark display does not show Mistaken or missing map data may result in
Change map CD.
actual conditions. erroneous display.
Course search data may not exist for closely Set the destination area to the general route
Recommended route drawn positioned starting point, way points, and des- (indicated by a thick brown line). However,
slightly away from starting point, tination area shown on the map. Route guide even if the selected route is a major one,
way points, and destination area. starting point, way point, and destination point appropriate route search data may not be
may be separated. available.
LOCATION OF CAR MARKER NHEL0304S04

쐌 If the vehicle has been parked in a multi-level parking facility or underground parking facility, the car marker
position may be inaccurate immediately after exiting the parking facility.
쐌 The GPS accuracy is within ±100 m (300 ft). Even when receiving conditions are excellent, further posi-
tional correction may not occur.
STREET INDICATION NHEL0304S05
쐌 Street names displayed on the map may differ from the actual street names.
쐌 An “Unknown Street” message may appear on the map in place of street name information.
RESEARCH NHEL0304S06
쐌 Position may be searched by house number. However, the displayed position and street may differ from
the actual position and street.
쐌 When position is searched using Point of Interest (POI), the displayed position may differ from the actual
position.
쐌 Some data may not be available for new buildings and other structures in a map.
GPS ANTENNA NHEL0304S07
쐌 Do not place metal objects above the GPS antenna mounted on the rear parcel shelf. This will cause
interference with signal reception.
쐌 Do not place mobile telephones or vehicle radio transceivers in close proximity to the GPS antenna
mounted on the rear parcel shelf. This may cause interference with signal reception.
EL-446
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Program Loading
Program Loading NHEL0305
Power supply ON
GI
Insert CD-ROM
with designated program.
MA
EM
LC
EC
Push for changing version.

FE
AT
No AX
SU
BR
* Display of program content
Yes
ST
RS
* Program loading progress is shown on the bar graph
at the center of the screen.
BT
HA
SC
Map CD-ROM insertion

Position marker screen display IDX
Note: Load the program only after the engine has been started. SEL564X
EL-447
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wir-
ing. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
FOR TCS MODELS NHEL0322S02
System Diagram NHEL0322S0201
SEL449Y
Input/Output Signal Chart NHEL0322S0202

T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals ECM ABS/TCS control unit TCM
Accelerator pedal position signal T R R
Output shaft revolution signal R T
TCS self-diagnostic signal R T
ABS self-diagnostic signal R T
FOR VDC MODELS NHEL0322S03

System Diagram NHEL0322S0301
SEL559YA
Input/output Signal Chart NHEL0322S0302

T: Transmit R: Receive
Steering angle sen- VDC/TCS/ABS con-
Signals ECM TCM
sor trol unit
Output shaft revolution signal R T
VDC/TCS self-diagnostic signal R T
ABS self-diagnostic signal R T
Engine speed signal T R
EL-448
CAN COMMUNICATION
Steering angle sen- VDC/TCS/ABS con-

Signals ECM TCM
sor trol unit
Accelerator pedal position signal T R R

GI
Steering angle sensor signal T R
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-449
CAN SYSTEM (FOR TCS MODELS)

Location NHEL0323
SEL434YA

electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
ing. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
EL-450
Wiring Diagram — CAN —
Wiring Diagram — CAN — NHEL0325
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL368O
EL-451
Trouble Diagnoses

1. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “ABS” and “A/T” displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
2. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “ABS” and “A/T” displayed on CONSULT-
II.
PKIA8343E
3. Attach the printed sheet of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check
sheet. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-453).
4. Based on the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” results, put “v” marks onto the items with “UNKWN” or “NG”
in the check sheet table. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-453).
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the
diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
5. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to “CHECK SHEET RESULTS
(EXAMPLE)” (EL-454).
EL-452
CHECK SHEET =NHEL0326S02
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
PKIA8323E
EL-453
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) =NHEL0326S03
NOTE:
Case 1 NHEL0326S0301
Check ECM circuit. Refer to “ECM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-455).
PKIA8325E
PKIA8335E
Check ABS/TCS control unit circuit. Refer to “ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-456).
PKIA8326E
PKIA8336E
EL-454
Check TCM circuit. Refer to “TCM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-457).
GI
MA
EM
PKIA8327E LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
PKIA8337E
Case 4 SU
NHEL0326S0304
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to “CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-457).
BR
ST
RS
BT
PKIA8328E
ECM CIRCUIT CHECK

HA
NHEL0326S05
1 CHECK CONNECTOR
SC
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection. (control module-side and harness-
side)
쐌 ECM
쐌 Harness connector F53
쐌 Harness connector M223
IDX
쐌 Harness connector E81
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
NG 䊳 Repair terminal or connector.
EL-455
2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

2. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F48 terminals 109 (L) and 113 (R).
SEL437Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Replace ECM.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between ABS/TCS control unit and ECM.
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0326S06
1 CHECK CONNECTOR
2. Check the terminals and connector of ABS/TCS control unit for damage, bend and loose connection. (control unit-side
and harness-side)
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.

1. Disconnect ABS/TCS control unit connector.
2. Check resistance between ABS/TCS control unit harness connector E162 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (R).
SEL438Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Replace ABS/TCS control unit.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between ABS/TCS control unit and harness connector E81.
EL-456
TCM CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0326S07
1 CHECK CONNECTOR
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection. (control module-side and harness- GI
side)
쐌 TCM
쐌 Harness connector F53 MA
쐌 Harness connector E81 EM
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2. LC
EC
1. Disconnect TCM connector. FE
2. Check resistance between TCM harness connector F51 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (R).
AT
AX
SU
BR
SEL439Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Replace TCM.
ST
NG 䊳 Repair harness ABS/TCS control unit and TCM.
RS
CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0326S08
1 CHECK CONNECTOR BT
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection. (control module-side, control unit-
side and harness-side) HA
쐌 TCM
쐌 ECM
쐌 ABS/TCS control unit SC
쐌 Between ECM and TCM
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
IDX
EL-457
2 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect ECM connector and harness connector F53.
2. Check continuity between ECM harness connector F48 terminals 109 (L) and 113 (R).
SEL431Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F53.

Check continuity between ECM harness connector F48 terminals 109 (L), 113 (R) and ground.
SEL432Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.
EL-458

1. Disconnect TCM connector.
2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F51 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (R).
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL440Y
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 GO TO 5.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector F53. FE
5 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT AT

Check continuity between TCM harness connector F51 terminals 5 (L), 6 (R) and ground.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL441Y
OK or NG RS
OK 䊳 GO TO 6.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector F53. BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-459

1. Disconnect harness connector M15.
2. Check continuity between harness connector M15 terminals 14C (L) and 15C (R).
SEL442Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 7.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between harness connector M223 and harness connector M15.

Check continuity between harness connector M15 terminals 14C (L), 15C (R) and ground.
SEL443Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 8.

Check continuity between harness connector M15 terminals 11C (L) and 12C (R).
SEL444Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 9.
EL-460

Check continuity between harness connector M15 terminals 11C (L), 12C (R) and ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL445Y
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 GO TO 10.
FE
1. Disconnect ABS/TCS control unit connector.
AT
2. Check continuity between ABS/TCS control unit harness connector E162 terminals 30 (L) and 29 (R).
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL446Y
OK or NG RS
OK 䊳 GO TO 11.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between ABS/TCS control unit and harness connector E81. BT
11 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT HA

Check continuity between ABS/TCS control unit harness connector E162 terminals 30 (L), 29 (R) and ground.
SC
IDX
SEL447Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 12.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between ABS/TCS control unit and harness connector E81.
EL-461
12 ECM/TCM INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check components inspection. Refer to “ECM/TCM INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION” (EL-462).
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to “Work Flow” (EL-452).
NG 䊳 Replace ECM and/or TCM.
Component Inspection NHEL0327

ECM/TCM INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION NHEL0327S01
쐌 Remove ECM and TCM from vehicle.
쐌 Check resistance between ECM terminals 109 and 113.
쐌 Check resistance between TCM terminals 5 and 6.
Unit Terminal Resistance value (Ω)
ECM 109 - 113

Approx. 108 - 132
TCM 5-6
SEL433Y
EL-462
CAN SYSTEM (FOR VDC MODELS)

Location NHEL0328
GI
MA
EM
SEL573Y
LC

EC
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with FE
ing. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-463
Wiring Diagram — CAN —
Wiring Diagram — CAN — NHEL0330
MEL647Q
EL-464
Trouble Diagnoses

1. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “VDC” and “A/T” displayed on CONSULT-II.
GI
MA
EM
LC
PKIA8260E
EC
2. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “VDC” and “A/T” displayed on CON-
SULT-II.
FE
AT
AX
SU
PKIA8343E
BR
3. Attach the printed sheet of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check
sheet. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-466).
4. Based on the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” results, put “v” marks onto the items with “UNKWN” or “NG” ST
in the check sheet table. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-466).
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the RS
5. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to “CHECK SHEET RESULTS BT
(EXAMPLE)” (EL-467).
HA
SC
IDX
EL-465
CHECK SHEET =NHEL0331S02
NOTE:
PKIA8324E
EL-466
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) =NHEL0331S03
NOTE:
GI
Check harness between VDC/TCS/ABS control unit and steering angle sensor. Refer to “CIRCUIT CHECK
BETWEEN VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT AND STEERING ANGLE SENSOR” (EL-469). MA
EM
LC
EC
PKIA8329E FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
PKIA8338E
Case 2 ST
NHEL0331S0302
Check ECM circuit. Refer to “ECM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-470).
RS
BT
HA
SC
PKIA8330E
IDX
PKIA8339E
EL-467
Check TCM circuit. Refer to “TCM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-471).
PKIA8331E
PKIA8340E
Check steering angle sensor circuit. Refer to “STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-472).
PKIA8332E
PKIA8341E
EL-468
Case 5 =NHEL0331S0305
Check VDC/TCS/ABS control unit circuit. Refer to “VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-
472).
GI
MA
EM
LC
PKIA8333E
EC
FE
AT
AX
PKIA8342E
SU
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to “CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-473).
BR
ST
RS
BT
PKIA8334E
HA
CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT AND STEERING ANGLE
SENSOR NHEL0331S09 SC
1 CHECK CONNECTOR
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection. (control unit-side, sensor-side and
harness-side)
쐌 VDC/TCS/ABS control unit IDX
쐌 Steering angle sensor
쐌 Between VDC/TCS/ABS control unit and steering angle sensor
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
EL-469

1. Disconnect VDC/TCS/ABS control unit connector and harness connector B58.
2. Check continuity between VDC/TCS/ABS control unit harness connector B57 terminals 61 (L), 63 (R) and harness con-
nector B58 terminals 9 (L), 20 (R).
SEL563Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.

1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector M218.
2. Check continuity between harness connector M227 terminals 9 (L), 20 (R) and steering angle sensor harness connec-
tor M218 terminals 4 (L), 5 (R).
SEL834Y
OK or NG
ECM CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0331S05
1 CHECK CONNECTOR
side)
쐌 ECM
쐌 Harness connector F53
쐌 Harness connector B2
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
EL-470

2. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F48 terminals 109 (L) and 113 (R).
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL437Y
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 Replace ECM.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between VDC/TCS/ABS control unit and ECM. FE
TCM CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0331S10
AT
1 CHECK CONNECTOR
AX
side)
쐌 TCM
쐌 Harness connector F53 SU
OK or NG BR
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
NG 䊳 Repair terminal or connector. ST

RS
2. Check resistance between TCM harness connector F51 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (R).
BT
HA
SC
SEL439Y
OK or NG IDX
OK 䊳 Replace TCM.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between steering angle sensor and TCM.
EL-471
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0331S11
1 CHECK CONNECTOR
2. Check the terminals and connector of steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection. (sensor-side and
harness-side)
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.

1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector.
2. Check resistance between steering angle sensor harness connector M218 terminals 4 (L) and 5 (R).
SEL565YA
OK or NG
OK 䊳 Replace steering angle sensor.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between steering angle sensor and harness connector M227.
VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0331S06
1 CHECK CONNECTOR
2. Check the terminals and connector of VDC/TCS/ABS control unit for damage, bend and loose connection. (control unit-
side and harness-side)
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2.
EL-472

1. Disconnect VDC/TCS/ABS control unit connector.
2. Check resistance between VDC/TCS/ABS control unit harness connector B57 terminals 61 (L) and 63 (R).
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL566Y
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 Replace VDC/TCS/ABS control unit.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between VDC/TCS/ABS control unit and harness connector B58. FE
CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0331S08
AT
1 CHECK CONNECTOR
2. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection. (control module-side, control unit-
AX
side, sensor-side and harness-side)
쐌 TCM
쐌 ECM SU
쐌 VDC/TCS/ABS control unit
쐌 Steering angle sensor
쐌 Between ECM and TCM BR
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 2. ST
RS
1. Disconnect ECM connector and harness connector F53. BT
2. Check continuity between ECM harness connector F48 terminals 109 (L) and 113 (R).
HA
SC
IDX
SEL431Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 3.
EL-473

Check continuity between ECM harness connector F48 terminals 109 (L), 113 (R) and ground.
SEL432Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 4.

1. Disconnect harness connector M2.
2. Check continuity between harness connector M2 terminals 22 (L) and 23 (R).
SEL567Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 5.

Check continuity between harness connector M2 terminals 22 (L), 23 (R) and ground.
SEL568Y
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 6.
EL-474

1. Disconnect VDC/TCS/ABS control unit connector and harness connector B58.
2. Check continuity between VDC/TCS/ABS control unit harness connector B57 terminals 61 (L) and 63 (R).
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL569Y
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 GO TO 7.
NG 䊳 쐌 Repair harness between VDC/TCS/ABS control unit and harness connector B58. FE
쐌 Repair harness between harness connector B2 and harness connector B58.
AT
Check continuity between VDC/TCS/ABS control unit harness connector B57 terminals 61 (L), 63 (R) and ground.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL570Y
RS
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 8.
BT
NG 䊳 쐌 Repair harness between VDC/TCS/ABS control unit and harness connector B58.
쐌 Repair harness between harness connector B2 and harness connector B58.
HA
SC
IDX
EL-475

1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector.
2. Check continuity between steering angle sensor harness connector M218 terminals 4 (L) and 5 (R).
SEL571YA
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 9.
NG 䊳 쐌 Repair harness between steering angle sensor and harness connector M227.
쐌 Repair harness between harness connector M227 and harness connector M223.

Check continuity between steering angle sensor harness connector M218 terminals 4 (L), 5 (R) and ground.
SEL572YA
OK or NG
OK 䊳 GO TO 10.
NG 䊳 쐌 Repair harness between steering angle sensor and harness connector M227.
쐌 Repair harness between harness connector M227 and harness connector M223.
EL-476

2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F51 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (R).
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEL440Y
OK or NG
EC
OK 䊳 GO TO 11.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector F53. FE
11 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT AT

Check continuity between TCM harness connector F51 terminals 5 (L), 6 (R) and ground.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SEL441Y
OK or NG RS
OK 䊳 GO TO 12.
NG 䊳 Repair harness between TCM and harness connector F53. BT
12 ECM/TCM INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION HA

Check components inspection. Refer to “ECM/TCM INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION” (EL-477).
OK or NG
SC
NG 䊳 Replace ECM and/or TCM.
Component Inspection NHEL0332

ECM/TCM INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION NHEL0332S01 IDX
쐌 Remove ECM and TCM from vehicle.
쐌 Check resistance between ECM terminals 109 and 113.
쐌 Check resistance between TCM terminals 5 and 6.
Unit Terminal Resistance value (Ω)
ECM 109 - 113

Approx. 108 - 132
TCM 5-6
SEL433Y
EL-477
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Engine Compartment
Engine Compartment NHEL0129
MEL873Q
EL-478
Engine Compartment (Cont’d)
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-479
Passenger Compartment
Passenger Compartment NHEL0130
MEL246O
EL-480
Passenger Compartment (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL247O
EL-481
Passenger Compartment (Cont’d)
MEL248O
EL-482
HARNESS LAYOUT
How to Read Harness Layout
How to Read Harness Layout NHEL0131
GI
MA
EM
SEL252V LC
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
쐌 Main Harness EC
쐌 Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment)
쐌 Engine Control Harness FE
쐌 Body Harness (Passenger Compartment)
TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE NHEL0131S01 AT
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list.
2. Find the grid reference.
3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. AX
4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone.
5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
SU
CONNECTOR SYMBOL NHEL0131S02
Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated in the below.
BR
Water proof type Standard type
Connector type
Male Female Male Female
ST
쐌 Cavity: Less than 4
쐌 Relay connector
RS
쐌 Cavity: From 5 to 8
쐌 Cavity: More than 9

BT
쐌 Ground terminal etc. HA

—
SC
IDX
EL-483
HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline
Outline NHEL0132
MEL211O
NOTE:
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution”, “GROUND”, EL-20.
EL-484
HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline (Cont’d)
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-485
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness
Main Harness NHEL0133
MEL862Q
EL-486
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL863Q
EL-487
HARNESS LAYOUT
MEL864Q
EL-488
HARNESS LAYOUT
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-489
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness
Engine Room Harness NHEL0134
MEL865Q
EL-490
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL866Q
EL-491
HARNESS LAYOUT
MEL867Q
EL-492
HARNESS LAYOUT
NOTE:
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-493
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness
Engine Control Harness NHEL0135
MEL868Q
EL-494
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL869Q
EL-495
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness
Body Harness NHEL0136
MEL870Q
EL-496
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL871Q
EL-497
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body No. 2 Harness
Body No. 2 Harness NHEL0137
MEL222O
EL-498
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body No. 2 Harness (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
MEL223O
EL-499
HARNESS LAYOUT
Tail Harness
Tail Harness NHEL0138
MEL224O
EL-500
HARNESS LAYOUT
Room Lamp Harness
Room Lamp Harness NHEL0140
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
MEL225O
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-501
HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness
Front Door Harness NHEL0142

LH SIDE NHEL0142S03
MEL226O
EL-502
HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness (Cont’d)
RH SIDE NHEL0142S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
MEL227O
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-503
HARNESS LAYOUT
Rear Door Harness
Rear Door Harness NHEL0143

LH SIDE NHEL0143S03
MEL228O
EL-504
HARNESS LAYOUT
Rear Door Harness (Cont’d)
RH SIDE NHEL0143S04
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
AT
AX
SU
MEL229O
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-505
NHEL0144
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
Headlamp
Headlamp NHEL0144S03
Item Wattage (W)
High/Low 60/35 (HB3)
Exterior Lamp NHEL0144S01
Item Wattage (W)
Front fog lamp 21 (H3)
Front turn signal lamp 21
Parking lamp 5
Front side marker lamp 3.8
Turn signal 21
Rear combination lamp Stop/Tail 21/5
Back-up 18
Rear side marker lamp 3.8
License lamp 5
Without rear air spoiler 5

High-mounted stop lamp
With rear air spoiler LED
Interior Lamp NHEL0144S02
Item Wattage (W)
Interior room lamp 10
Spot lamp 8
Vanity mirror lamp 8
Trunk room lamp 3.4
Step lamp 2.7
EL-506
NHEL0145
WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring

Code Section Wiring Diagram Name
diagram code stands for.
Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical COOL/F EC Cooling Fan Control
index to find the location (page number) of each
wiring diagram. CORNER EL Cornering Lamp GI
DEF EL Rear Window Defogger
1STSIG AT A/T 1ST Signal

D/LOCK EL Power Door Lock MA
DLC EC Data Link Connectors
2NDSIG AT A/T 2ND Signal
3RDSIG AT A/T 3RD Signal DTRL EL

Headlamp - With Daytime Light EM
System
4THSIG AT A/T 4TH Signal
ECM/PW EC ECM Power Supply
LC
A/C, A HA Auto Air Conditioner
Engine Coolant Temperature
ECTS EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sen- Sensor
APPS1 EC EC
sor (Sensor 1)
Electronic Controlled Engine
EMNT EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sen- Mount
APPS2 EC
sor (Sensor 2) FE
ENGSS AT Engine Speed Signal
Accelerator Pedal Position Sen-
APPS3 EC Electrical Throttle Control Func-
sor ETC1 EC
tion AT
Automatic Speed Control Device
ASC/BS EC Electrical Throttle Control Motor
(ASCD) Brake Switch ETC2 EC
Relay
Automatic Speed Control Device AX
ASC/SW EC ETC3 EC Electrical Throttle Control Motor
(ASCD) Steering Switch
F/FOG EL Front Fog Lamp
ASC/VS EC
Automatic Speed Control Device SU
(ASCD) Vehicle Speed Sensor Fuel Level Sensor Circuit
FLS1 EC
(SLOSH)
Automatic Speed Control Device
ASCBOF EC
(ASCD) Brake Switch (Off) FLS2 EC Fuel Level Sensor Circuit
BR
Automatic Speed Control Device Fuel Level Sensor Circit (Ground
ASCIND EC FLS3 EC
(ASCD) Indicator Signal) ST
AT/IND EL A/T Indicator F/PUMP EC Fuel Pump Control
AUDIO EL Audio FTS AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor RS
AUT/DP EL Automatic Drive Positioner FTTS EC Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
BACK/L EL Back-up Lamp Fuel Injection System Function BT
FUELB1 EC
(Bank 1)
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
BA/FTS AT
and TCM Power Supply
FUELB2 EC
Fuel Injection System Function HA
(Bank 2)
B/COMP EL Board Computer
H/LAMP EL Headlamp
BRK/SW EC Brake Switch SC
HORN EL Horn
BYPS/V EC Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve
HSEAT EL Heated Seat
CAN AT CAN Communication Line
H/STRG EL Heated Steering
CAN EC CAN Communication Line
Inside Mirror (Auto Anti-dazzling
CAN EL CAN System I/MIRR EL
Mirror)
IDX
CHARGE SC Charging System
IATS EC Intake Air Temperature Sensor
CHIME EL Warning Chime
IGNSYS EC Ignition Signal
CIGAR EL Cigarette Lighter
ILL EL Illumination
CLOCK EL Clock
INJECT EC Injector
COMPAS EL Compass
EL-507
Code Section Wiring Diagram Name Code Section Wiring Diagram Name
Interior, Step, Spot, Vanity Mirror EVAP Canister Purge Volume

INT/L EL PGC/V EC
and Trunk Room Lamps Control Solenoid Valve
Intake Valve Timing Control Sole- PNP/SW AT Park/Neutral Position Switch

IVCB1 EC
noid Valve (Bank 1)
PNP/SW EC Park/Neutral Position Switch
Intake Valve Timing Control Sole-
IVCB2 EC Crankshaft Position Sensor
noid Valve (Bank 2) POS EC
(CKPS) (POS)
KEYLES EL Remote Keyless Entry System
POWER EL Power Supply Routing
KS EC Knock Sensor
EVAP Control System Pressure
PRE/SE EC
LOAD EC Electrical Load Signal Sensor
LPSV AT Line Pressure Solenoid Valve PS/SEN EC Power Steering Pressure Sensor
MAFS EC Mass Air Flow Sensor PT/SEN AT Power Train Revolution Sensor
Main Power Supply and Ground REMOTE EL Audio (Remote Control Switch)
MAIN AT
Circuit
RP/SEN EC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
Main Power Supply and Ground
MAIN EC SEAT EL Power Seat
Circuit
Speedometer, Tachometer, SEN/PW EC Sensor Power Supply

METER EL
Temp., and Fuel Gauges SHADE EL Rear Sunshade
MIL EC Malfunction Indicator Lamp SHIFT AT A/T Shift Lock System
MIRROR EL Power Door Mirror SROOF EL Sunroof
IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer SRS RS Supplemental Restraint System
NATS EL
System — NATS)
S/SIG EC Start Signal
NAVI EL Navigation System
SSV/A AT Shift Solenoid Valve A
NONDTC AT Non-detectable Items
SSV/B AT Shift Solenoid Valve B
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater
O2H1B1 EC
(Bank 1) START SC Starting System
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater STOP/L EL Stop Lamp

O2H1B2 EC
(Bank 2)
TAIL/L EL Parking, License and Tail Lamps
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
O2H2B1 EC TCCSIG AT A/T TCC Signal (Lock Up)
(Bank 1)
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater TCS BR Traction Control System

O2H2B2 EC
(Bank 2)
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
TCV AT
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (Bank Valve
O2S1B1 EC
1)
Trunk Lid and Fuel Filler Lid
T&FLID EL
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (Bank Opener
O2S1B2 EC
2)
TPS AT Throttle Position Sensor
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Bank
O2S2B1 EC Throttle Position Sensor (Sensor
1) TPS1 EC
1)
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Bank
O2S2B2 EC Throttle Position Sensor (Sensor
2) TPS2 EC
2)
OVRCSV AT Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve
TPS3 EC Throttle Position Sensor
Camshaft Position Sensor
PHASE EC TRNSCV EL Homelink Universal Transceiver
(Phase) Bank 1
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
Camshaft Position Sensor TURN EL
PHASE EC Lamps
(Phase) Bank 2
VDC BR Vehicle Dynamics Control
PHONE EL Telephone (Pre-wire)
EL-508
Vehicle Security (Theft Warning)

VEHSEC EL
System
GI
EVAP Canister Vent Control
VENT/V EC
Valve
Variable Induction Air Control MA

VIAS EC
System
VIAS/V EC
Variable Induction Air Control EM
System
VSS EC Vehicle Speed Sensor

LC
Vehicle Speed Sensor·A/T
VSSA/T AT
(Revolution Sensor)
VSSMTR AT Vehicle Speed Sensor MTR EC

W/ANT EL Audio Antenna
WARN EL Warning Lamps

FE
WINDOW EL Power Window
AT
WIPER EL Front Wiper and Washer
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
IDX
EL-509
NOTES

Electrical System: GI MA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical System: GI MA

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical System: GI MA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

Precautions for Harness Repair NHEL0312

Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis NHEL0002

Wiring Diagram — POWER — NHEL0006

FUSIBLE LINK NHEL0007S02 LC

Ground Distribution NHEL0008

Component Parts and Harness Connector

Wiring Diagram — H/STRG — =NHEL0316

Component Parts and Harness Connector

System Description NHEL0253

Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — NHEL0255

CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure NHEL0256

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

6. Touch “HEAD LAMP”.

7. Select diagnosis mode.

CONSULT-II Application Items NHEL0317

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

Active Test NHEL0317S0102 AX

Work Support NHEL0317S0103 ST

AUTO LIGHT SET

LH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

RH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

XENON BULB (LOW BEAM) NHEL0259S01

HIGH BEAM NHEL0259S02

Aiming Adjustment =NHEL0260

Component Parts and Harness Connector

System Description NHEL0262

OFF 1ST 2ND OFF 1ST 2ND

Clearance and tail lamp X X X O O O O O O X X X O O O O O O

License and instrument illumination

A: “HIGH BEAM” position

Wiring Diagram — DTRL — NHEL0264

Trouble Diagnoses NHEL0265

LH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

RH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

Daytime light control does not 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE NHEL0265S03

Terminal Wire Voltage

1 BR Alternator When turning ignition switch to “ON” Less than 1V

When engine is running Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Less than 1V

When turning ignition switch to “ON” from “ST” Less than 1V

When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Less than 1V

3 G Power source When turning ignition switch to “ON” Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to “ST” Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Less than 1V

4 OR Power source When turning ignition switch to “ON” Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Battery voltage

5 R Power source When turning ignition switch to “ON” Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Battery voltage

Terminal Wire Voltage

17 Y Parking brake When parking brake is released Battery voltage HA

Bulb Replacement NHEL0266

Aiming Adjustment NHEL0267